WO2021241337A1 - Package - Google Patents

Package Download PDF

Info

Publication number
WO2021241337A1
WO2021241337A1 PCT/JP2021/018863 JP2021018863W WO2021241337A1 WO 2021241337 A1 WO2021241337 A1 WO 2021241337A1 JP 2021018863 W JP2021018863 W JP 2021018863W WO 2021241337 A1 WO2021241337 A1 WO 2021241337A1
Authority
WO
WIPO (PCT)
Prior art keywords
surface portion
weakening line
weakening
package
vertical
Prior art date
Application number
PCT/JP2021/018863
Other languages
French (fr)
Japanese (ja)
Inventor
英人 宇都宮
隆将 村井
温樹 戸田
真伍 奥野
Original Assignee
ユニ・チャーム株式会社
Priority date (The priority date is an assumption and is not a legal conclusion. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation as to the accuracy of the date listed.)
Filing date
Publication date
Priority claimed from JP2020092657A external-priority patent/JP7106602B2/en
Priority claimed from JP2020092663A external-priority patent/JP7174010B2/en
Application filed by ユニ・チャーム株式会社 filed Critical ユニ・チャーム株式会社
Priority to CN202180038427.9A priority Critical patent/CN115667090B/en
Publication of WO2021241337A1 publication Critical patent/WO2021241337A1/en

Links

Images

Classifications

    • BPERFORMING OPERATIONS; TRANSPORTING
    • B65CONVEYING; PACKING; STORING; HANDLING THIN OR FILAMENTARY MATERIAL
    • B65DCONTAINERS FOR STORAGE OR TRANSPORT OF ARTICLES OR MATERIALS, e.g. BAGS, BARRELS, BOTTLES, BOXES, CANS, CARTONS, CRATES, DRUMS, JARS, TANKS, HOPPERS, FORWARDING CONTAINERS; ACCESSORIES, CLOSURES, OR FITTINGS THEREFOR; PACKAGING ELEMENTS; PACKAGES
    • B65D75/00Packages comprising articles or materials partially or wholly enclosed in strips, sheets, blanks, tubes, or webs of flexible sheet material, e.g. in folded wrappers
    • B65D75/52Details
    • B65D75/58Opening or contents-removing devices added or incorporated during package manufacture
    • BPERFORMING OPERATIONS; TRANSPORTING
    • B65CONVEYING; PACKING; STORING; HANDLING THIN OR FILAMENTARY MATERIAL
    • B65DCONTAINERS FOR STORAGE OR TRANSPORT OF ARTICLES OR MATERIALS, e.g. BAGS, BARRELS, BOTTLES, BOXES, CANS, CARTONS, CRATES, DRUMS, JARS, TANKS, HOPPERS, FORWARDING CONTAINERS; ACCESSORIES, CLOSURES, OR FITTINGS THEREFOR; PACKAGING ELEMENTS; PACKAGES
    • B65D85/00Containers, packaging elements or packages, specially adapted for particular articles or materials
    • B65D85/07Containers, packaging elements or packages, specially adapted for particular articles or materials for compressible or flexible articles

Definitions

  • the present invention relates to a package of an absorbent article.
  • a package in which an absorbent article such as a urine absorbing pad is stored in a packaging bag is known.
  • the packaging bag has a perforated line on the outside. The user cuts off the weakening line to form an opening in the packaging bag, and takes out the absorbent article stored in the packaging bag from the opening.
  • Patent Document 1 discloses a wrapping bag (packaging body) for disposable diapers and the like.
  • This packaging bag (packaging body) is substantially parallel to the bottom surface of the packaging bag (packaging body) in the section from the upper surface of the object to be filled and accommodated below the seal line of the upper opening to the vicinity thereof.
  • a break line (weak line) is attached.
  • the user uses a package containing an absorbent article in various modes.
  • the upper surface portion which is a portion above the weakening line in the packaging bag, is removed to form an opening on the upper side of the packaging bag, and the absorbent article is taken out from the opening. That is, there may be a mode in which the package is completely opened.
  • a part of the outer periphery of the upper surface portion of the packaging bag is torn to form an opening on the upper side of the packaging bag while the upper surface portion is partially connected to the remaining portion of the packaging bag.
  • the upper surface portion can be gripped and the package can be easily carried, and the absorbent article can be taken out from the opening at any place.
  • the degree of opening of the upper surface of the package is adjusted according to various modes of use.
  • a weakening line may be continuously provided over the entire circumference of the packaging bag.
  • the upper surface of the packaging bag is removed to form an opening, thus completely opening the package, and the opening is opened with the upper surface partially bonded to the rest of the packaging bag.
  • the weight of the absorbent article may cause further weakening line separation between the top surface and the rest of the package bag when the package is carried.
  • the upper surface portion is likely to come off from the remaining portion of the packaging bag, and it becomes difficult to carry the package. That is, it is difficult to control the opening of the package because the package cannot be maintained in a partially opened state and may be in a completely opened state.
  • weakening lines are independently provided at the corners of the packaging bag at the same height, and the front portion, both side surface portions, and the back surface portion are slightly lower than the weakening lines. Further weakening lines may be provided for each. In this case, these plurality of weakening lines are not continuously provided over the entire circumference of the packaging bag. That is, at the corners, adjacent weakening lines are separated from each other. Therefore, in the embodiment of partially opening the package, some of the multiple weakening lines between the top surface and the rest of the packaging bag, due to the weight of the absorbent article, when the package is carried. Detachment of the weakening line may occur.
  • the separation of those weakening lines stops at the corners, so it does not extend to the adjacent weakening lines. That is, the disconnection does not occur in all of the plurality of weakening lines, and the upper surface portion does not come off from the packaging bag. Thereby, the upper surface portion can be gripped and the package can be carried. That is, it is easy to control the opening of the package.
  • the multiple weakening lines are separated from each other, all of the multiple weakening lines are separated to remove the upper surface of the packaging bag, and some of the multiple weakening lines are separated to separate the upper surface. It is not easy to partially separate. That is, in any aspect, it is not easy to open the package.
  • the absorbent article may unintentionally fall out of the opening.
  • the size of the opening is too small, when the absorbent article is taken out, it may be caught in the opening and it may be difficult to take out.
  • an object of the present invention is to provide a package that can achieve both the ease of opening the package and the controllability of the degree of opening of the package.
  • Another object of the present invention is to prevent the absorbent article from falling out from the opening and to take out the absorbent article from the opening in the packaging body in which the opening is formed by the weakening line in the packaging bag. It is an object of the present invention to provide a package and a method for manufacturing the same, which can be compatible with facilitating the above.
  • the package of one aspect of the present invention is as follows.
  • a package having a width direction, a depth direction, and a vertical direction, a plurality of absorbent articles, and a packaging bag having a plurality of side surfaces and storing the plurality of absorbent articles.
  • the plurality of side surface portions include a front surface portion, a rear surface portion, a right surface portion, and a left surface portion
  • the packaging bag includes a portion where the front surface portion and the right surface portion intersect, and a portion where the front surface portion and the left surface portion intersect.
  • Each of the portion where the rear surface portion and the right surface portion intersects and the portion where the rear surface portion and the left surface portion intersect has a corner portion, and each of the front surface portion and the rear surface portion extends along the width direction.
  • the first weakening lines that are adjacent to each other are separated from each other at the corners, and the first weakening line and the second weakening line that are adjacent to each other are separated from each other, and the second weakening lines that are adjacent to each other are separated from each other.
  • the distance between the line and the first weakening line is shorter than the distance between adjacent first weakening lines, and the extension of the end of the second weakening line is adjacent to the end of the second weakening line.
  • the packaging body of another aspect of the present invention is as follows.
  • a packaging body comprising a plurality of absorbent articles having a width direction, a depth direction, and a vertical direction, and a packaging bag having a plurality of side surfaces and storing the plurality of absorbent articles.
  • the plurality of side surface portions include a front surface portion, a rear surface portion, a right surface portion, and a left surface portion
  • the packaging bag includes a portion where the front surface portion and the right surface portion intersect, and a portion where the front surface portion and the left surface portion intersect.
  • Each of the portion where the rear surface portion and the right surface portion intersects and the portion where the rear surface portion and the left surface portion intersect has a corner portion, and each of the front surface portion and the rear surface portion extends along the width direction.
  • the second weakening line is provided with at least one adjacent first weakening line separated from the first weakening line, and at least one of the front surface portion, the rear surface portion, the right surface portion, and the left surface portion. Even if the separation of the first weakening line propagates to the corner portion due to the weight of the plurality of absorbent articles when the upper portion in the vertical direction is grasped and the package is lifted.
  • the packaging is formed in an unreachable position.
  • a packaging body comprising a plurality of absorbent articles having a width direction, a depth direction, and a vertical direction, and a packaging bag having a plurality of side surfaces and storing the plurality of absorbent articles.
  • the plurality of side surfaces includes a front surface portion, a rear surface portion, a right surface portion, and a left surface portion
  • the packaging bag includes an opening portion in at least one of the plurality of side surface portions
  • the opening portion includes the opening portion in the vertical direction.
  • Two vertical weakening lines extending along the width direction or the depth direction and arranged at intervals, and the vertical weakening lines extending along the width direction or the depth direction and extending in the vertical direction in the two vertical weakening lines.
  • the plurality of absorbent articles are arranged vertically in the package in the width direction or the depth direction, including a horizontal weakening line connecting the upper ends, and the two vertical weakening lines.
  • a package in which the position of the lower end in the vertical direction on the line is higher than the position of the lower end in the vertical direction in the plurality of absorbent articles and lower than the position in the middle of the vertical direction in the plurality of absorbent articles.
  • the method for producing a package according to still another aspect of the present invention is as follows. It has a width direction, a depth direction, and a vertical direction, has a plurality of side surface portions including a front surface portion, a rear surface portion, a right surface portion, and a left surface portion, and at least one of the plurality of side surface portions includes an opening portion, and the opening portion is included.
  • the portion extends along the vertical direction and extends along the width direction or the depth direction and two vertical weakening lines arranged at intervals in the width direction or the depth direction.
  • a packaging bag capable of storing a plurality of absorbent articles, including a lateral weakening line connecting the upper ends of the weakening line in the vertical direction, having a transport direction, a transverse direction, and a thickness direction.
  • a lateral weakening line connecting the upper ends of the weakening line in the vertical direction, having a transport direction, a transverse direction, and a thickness direction.
  • both sides in the transverse direction are folded in a valley fold toward the inside of the transverse direction, so that one side and the other side in the thickness direction can be obtained.
  • a side surface that is folded between the front surface portion and the rear surface portion and forms the right surface portion and the left surface portion that are located on the right side and the left side in the transverse direction, respectively.
  • the two vertical lengths extending in the transport direction are applied to the front surface portion and the rear surface portion.
  • the right surface portion and the left surface portion are provided with a weakening line forming step of forming the two vertical weakening lines and the horizontal weakening line.
  • the position of the lower end of the two vertical weakening lines in the transport direction is the vertical direction parallel to the transport direction of the plurality of absorbent articles when the plurality of absorbent articles are stored in the packaging bag.
  • the present invention further, in a package in which an opening is formed by a weakening line in the packaging bag, it is possible to suppress the falling of the absorbent article from the opening and to easily take out the absorbent article from the opening. It is possible to provide a package and a method for producing the same, which can be compatible with the above.
  • a package having a width direction, a depth direction, and a vertical direction, a plurality of absorbent articles, and a packaging bag having a plurality of side surfaces and storing the plurality of absorbent articles.
  • the plurality of side surface portions include a front surface portion, a rear surface portion, a right surface portion, and a left surface portion
  • the packaging bag includes a portion where the front surface portion and the right surface portion intersect, and a portion where the front surface portion and the left surface portion intersect.
  • Each of the portion where the rear surface portion and the right surface portion intersects and the portion where the rear surface portion and the left surface portion intersect has a corner portion, and each of the front surface portion and the rear surface portion extends along the width direction.
  • the first weakening lines that are adjacent to each other are separated from each other at the corners, and the first weakening line and the second weakening line that are adjacent to each other are separated from each other, and the second weakening lines that are adjacent to each other are separated from each other.
  • the distance between the line and the first weakening line is shorter than the distance between adjacent first weakening lines, and the extension of the end of the second weakening line is adjacent to the end of the second weakening line.
  • a second weakening line is formed in the vicinity of the first weakening line at the corner portion, and an extension line at the end of the second weakening line intersects the first weakening line adjacent to the second weakening line.
  • a plurality of first weakening lines provided over the entire circumference (front portion, rear surface portion, right surface portion and left surface portion) of the packaging bag are not continuously provided. That is, at the corners, the adjacent first weakening lines are separated from each other. Further, the plurality of second weakening lines provided at the full-width portion of the packaging bag are separated from each other by a predetermined distance from the adjacent first weakening line among the plurality of first weakening lines.
  • the upper surface portion in the vertical direction from the first weakening line and the second weakening line of the front surface portion, the rear surface portion, the right surface portion, and the left surface portion is the upper surface portion.
  • the weight of the absorbent article causes the separating force to be the first weakening line separated for opening. From, the separation may occur or proceed by propagating to the first weakening line that is not separated.
  • the separation of the first weakening line stops at the corner and does not shift to the adjacent second weakening line, and does not further shift to the adjacent first weakening line.
  • the upper surface does not come off from the packaging bag. As a result, the user can grasp the upper surface portion and carry the package to another place (the carrying durability becomes high).
  • the packaging body adjusts the degree of separation of the upper surface portion of the packaging bag according to various usage modes, that is, the controllability of the opening degree of the packaging body and the upper surface portion of the packaging bag. It is possible to achieve both complete or partial easy separation, that is, ease of opening the package.
  • the first weakening line is formed at the same position as the upper edge of the plurality of absorbent articles in the vertical direction or at a position above the edge, and the second weakening line is the first weakening line.
  • the package according to aspect 1 or 2 which is formed at a position above the line in the vertical direction.
  • the first weakening line is formed in the vertical direction at the same position as the upper edge of the absorbent article stored in the packaging bag or at a position above the edge, and the second weakening line is formed. Is located above the first weakening line in the vertical direction. Therefore, the position of the second weakening line does not overlap with the position of the absorbent article in the package.
  • the user can easily pick the vicinity of the second weakening line, for example, without being affected by the inflated portion, and perform the second weakening.
  • the lines can be easily separated. That is, the package can be easily opened.
  • the second weakening line has a convex shape on the upper side or the lower side in the vertical direction, with the central portion of the second weakening line in the direction along the surface of the package as an apex.
  • the package according to any one of the items.
  • the second weakening line has a convex shape in the vertical direction, with the central portion in the direction along the surface of the package as the apex, and thus both sides, that is, adjacent first weakening lines.
  • the portion on the line side has a shape that asymptotes to the first weakening line.
  • the force of the disconnection is applied to the second weakening line along the portion of the second weakening line on the first weakening line side. It is possible to make a smoother transition from the first weakening line to the first weakening line. Thereby, the separation at both weakening lines can be performed more easily, and the package can be opened more easily.
  • the present package includes a handle portion provided on a front surface portion, a rear surface portion, a right surface portion, and an upper portion in the vertical direction on the left surface portion, for example, an upper surface portion or an upper portion of the upper surface portion.
  • the weight of the absorbent article may separate the remaining portion of the outer circumference of the upper surface from the rest of the packaging bag.
  • this package since this package has the above-mentioned structure, it does not cause a situation in which the partially bonded upper surface portions are separated.
  • the right surface portion and the left surface portion are portions folded in a valley fold on the right side and the left side in the width direction between the front surface portion and the rear surface portion, respectively, and the right surface portion and the front surface portion are the same.
  • the second weakening line at the corner portion has a shape symmetrical with respect to the boundary line between the right surface portion and the front surface portion, and the second weakening line at the corner portion between the right surface portion and the rear surface portion.
  • the second weakening line of the corner portion between the left surface portion and the rear surface portion has a shape symmetrical with respect to the boundary line with the portion, and the second weakening line is with respect to the boundary line between the left surface portion and the rear surface portion.
  • the second weakening line has a shape that is line-symmetrical with respect to the boundary line between each of the right surface portion and the left surface portion and each of the front surface portion and the rear surface portion.
  • the second weakening line is separated from the corners of the right and left surfaces and the front and rear surfaces, respectively, so that the second weakening line and the front surface of the right and left surfaces are separated from each other. And each second weakening line of the rear surface portion can be broken together at the same time. Thereby, both second weakening lines can be separated more easily, and the package can be opened more easily as a whole.
  • the first weakening line is formed at the same position as the upper edge of the plurality of absorbent articles housed in the package in the vertical direction or at a position above the edge, and the second weakening line is formed.
  • the first weakening line is formed at the same position as the upper edge of the plurality of absorbent articles or at a position above the edge, and the second weakening line is located above the first weakening line. There is. Therefore, the position of the second weakening line in the package does not overlap with the position of the stored absorbent article.
  • the user can easily pick the vicinity of the second weakening line, for example, without being affected by the inflated portion.
  • the second weakening line can be easily separated. That is, the package can be easily opened.
  • the second weakening line has an arch-shaped shape having an apex at the center in the direction along the surface of the package.
  • the second weakening line has an arch shape having the center in the direction along the surface of the package as an apex, and thus has a substantially arc shape. Therefore, in the embodiment of partially opening the package, when the upper surface portion is grasped and the package is to be carried, the weight of the absorbent article causes the separation of the first weakening line to propagate to the adjacent second weakening line. Even so, since the second weakening line is arched, the separating force is dispersed, and it becomes difficult for the second weakening line to be separated. As a result, the upper surface portion can be gripped and the package can be stably carried to another place (the carrying durability is increased).
  • a packaging body comprising a plurality of absorbent articles having a width direction, a depth direction, and a vertical direction, and a packaging bag having a plurality of side surfaces and storing the plurality of absorbent articles.
  • the plurality of side surface portions include a front surface portion, a rear surface portion, a right surface portion, and a left surface portion
  • the packaging bag includes a portion where the front surface portion and the right surface portion intersect, and a portion where the front surface portion and the left surface portion intersect.
  • Each of the portion where the rear surface portion and the right surface portion intersects and the portion where the rear surface portion and the left surface portion intersect has a corner portion, and each of the front surface portion and the rear surface portion extends along the width direction.
  • the second weakening line is provided with at least one adjacent first weakening line separated from the first weakening line, and at least one of the front surface portion, the rear surface portion, the right surface portion, and the left surface portion. Even if the separation of the first weakening line propagates to the corner portion due to the weight of the plurality of absorbent articles when the upper portion in the vertical direction is grasped and the package is lifted.
  • the packaging is formed in an unreachable position.
  • the present package has a first weakening line formed so as to extend along the width direction or the depth direction on each of the front portion, the rear surface portion, the right surface portion, and the left surface portion, and is formed so as to straddle the corner portions. It has a second weakening line. Therefore, the package can be easily opened by using the first weakening wire and the second weakening wire.
  • the upper surface portion in the vertical direction from the first weakening line and the second weakening line of the front surface portion, the rear surface portion, the right surface portion, and the left surface portion is the upper surface portion.
  • the second weakening line at the corner is formed at a position where the separation of the first weakening line cannot be reached even if it propagates to the corner.
  • the upper surface portion can be gripped and the package can be stably carried to another place.
  • this package can achieve both the ease of opening the package and the controllability of the degree of opening of the package.
  • a packaging body comprising a plurality of absorbent articles having a width direction, a depth direction, and a vertical direction, and a packaging bag having a plurality of side surfaces and storing the plurality of absorbent articles.
  • the plurality of side surfaces includes a front surface portion, a rear surface portion, a right surface portion, and a left surface portion
  • the packaging bag includes an opening portion in at least one of the plurality of side surface portions
  • the opening portion includes the opening portion in the vertical direction.
  • Two vertical weakening lines extending along the width direction or the depth direction and arranged at intervals, and the vertical weakening lines extending along the width direction or the depth direction and extending in the vertical direction in the two vertical weakening lines.
  • the plurality of absorbent articles are arranged vertically in the package in the width direction or the depth direction, including a horizontal weakening line connecting the upper ends, and the two vertical weakening lines.
  • a package in which the position of the lower end in the vertical direction on the line is higher than the position of the lower end in the vertical direction in the plurality of absorbent articles and lower than the position in the middle of the vertical direction in the plurality of absorbent articles.
  • the user separates the horizontal weakening line and the two vertical weakening lines at the opening portion of the packaging bag to form an opening in the packaging bag, and the user is stored in the packaging bag through the opening.
  • the absorbent article can be taken out.
  • the position of the lower end in the vertical direction on the two vertical weakening lines is higher than the position of the lower end in the vertical direction in the plurality of absorbent articles. Therefore, when the opened portion is opened, the lower portion of the absorbent article is located below the lower end of the opening portion, and is protected by the packaging bag. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the absorbent article from unintentionally falling out of the opening.
  • the absorbent article when the absorbent article is taken out, it is possible to prevent other absorbent articles from unintentionally falling out of the opening.
  • the position of the lower end in the vertical direction on the two vertical weakening lines is lower than the position in the middle in the vertical direction in the plurality of absorbent articles. Therefore, when the opened portion is opened, the upper half or more of the absorbent article is located above the lower end of the opening and is exposed from the opening. Therefore, when the absorbent article is taken out, it can be prevented from being caught in the opening. As described above, in this package, it is possible to suppress the falling of the absorbent article from the opening and to facilitate the removal of the absorbent article from the opening.
  • the opening portion is arranged in at least one of the front surface portion and the rear surface portion, and at least one of the right surface portion and the left surface portion.
  • the opening portion is arranged on the front surface portion or the rear surface portion, and the right side surface portion or the left side surface portion. That is, in the package, an opening portion facing the depth direction and an opening portion facing the width direction are formed. Therefore, the user can take out the absorbent article from each of the openings facing in the width direction and the depth direction by opening both the opening portions. Therefore, even if the package is placed in any place, the absorbent article can be easily taken out from the opening of any opening portion.
  • the opening portion is formed so as to cover a part of the upper surface portion in the vertical direction of the plurality of absorbent articles stored in the packaging bag, and the lateral weakening line of the opening portion is the opening portion.
  • the opening portion is formed so as to cover a part of the upper surface portion of the plurality of absorbent articles stored in the packaging bag, and the lateral weakening line is a part of the upper surface portion in the opening portion. It is formed in the part that covers.
  • the opening can be formed so that the region from the upper surface portion to the side surface portion of the plurality of absorbent articles stored in the packaging bag is exposed.
  • the absorbent article can be easily seen at the opening, and the upper surface portion of the absorbent article can be less likely to be caught by the upper end of the opening. can. Therefore, the absorbent article can be more easily removed from the opening.
  • the distance between the two vertical weakening lines in the width direction or the depth direction is 30% of the length of each of the plurality of side surface portions in the width direction or the depth direction.
  • the distance between the two vertical weakening lines is 30% or more and 80% or less of the length of the side surface portion. That is, the length of the opening of the opened portion is 30% to 80% of the length of the side surface portion, and the length of the portion other than the opening of the side surface portion is 70 to 20% of the length of the side surface portion.
  • the length of the opening of the opened portion By setting the length of the opening of the opened portion to 30% or more, the frontage of the opening is widened, so that the absorbent article can be more easily taken out from the opening. Furthermore, by setting the length of the opening of the opened portion to 80% or less, the length of the portion other than the opening of the side portion can be made to exceed 20%, so that the shape of the package (packaging bag) is not easily deformed. can do. Therefore, the absorbent article can be easily taken out from the side surface portion without breaking the overall shape of the packaging bag.
  • Aspect 16 Aspects 12 to 15, wherein the distance between the weakening portions constituting the central portion in the width direction or the depth direction of the horizontal weakening line is shorter than the distance between the weakening portions constituting each of the two vertical weakening lines.
  • the separation of the horizontal weakening line can be easily started, and further, the separation of each of the two vertical weakening lines can be easily performed following the separation of the horizontal weakening line. Therefore, the opening of the opened portion can be easily formed, and the absorbent article can be more easily taken out from the opening.
  • the plurality of absorbent articles are laminated in at least two stages in the vertical direction, and the position of the lower end in the vertical direction on the two vertical weakening lines is the uppermost stage of the plurality of absorbent articles.
  • the opening portion of the uppermost absorbent article among the plurality of absorbent articles is opened, it is possible to prevent the absorbent article from unintentionally falling out of the opening. Further, when the absorbent article is taken out, it is possible to prevent other absorbent articles from unintentionally falling out of the opening.
  • the absorbent article when the absorbent article is taken out, it can be prevented from being caught in the opening. Further, even if a plurality of absorbent articles are stacked in at least two stages, the absorbent articles in the upper stage can be taken out in order, so that part or all of the absorbent articles does not spill out from the opening. The absorbent article can be easily taken out. Further, since the unused absorbent article in the lower stage is covered with the packaging bag until it is taken out, its cleanliness can be maintained. As described above, in this package, it is possible to suppress the falling of the absorbent article from the opening and to facilitate the removal of the absorbent article from the opening, and it is possible to achieve both the absorbency of the lower stage. The cleanliness of the goods can be maintained.
  • At least one of the right surface portion and the left surface portion, and at least one of the front surface portion and the rear surface portion, the positions of the lower ends in the vertical direction on the two vertical weakening lines are the same, embodiments 12 to 17.
  • the positions of the lower ends of the two vertical weakening lines are the same on at least one of the right surface portion and the left surface portion and at least one of the front surface portion and the rear surface portion. Therefore, even if both the opening portion of the right surface portion or the left surface portion, that is, the opening portion that opens in the width direction, and the opening portion of the front portion or the rear surface portion, that is, the opening portion that opens in the depth direction are opened, the opening portion of the opening portion.
  • the positions of the lower ends can be aligned in the same way. As a result, once the user grasps the position of the lower end of one of the opening portions, the position of the lower end is visually confirmed each time even when the absorbent article is taken out from any opening portion.
  • the absorbent article can be easily taken out from the side surface portion without doing so.
  • At least one of the right surface portion and the left surface portion, and at least one of the front surface portion and the rear surface portion, the positions of the upper ends in the vertical direction on the two vertical weakening lines are the same, aspects 12 to 12 to The package according to any one of 18.
  • the positions of the upper ends of the two vertical weakening lines are the same in at least one of the right surface portion and the left surface portion and at least one of the front surface portion and the rear surface portion. Therefore, even if both the opening portion of the right surface portion or the left surface portion, that is, the opening portion that opens in the width direction, and the opening portion of the front portion or the rear surface portion, that is, the opening portion that opens in the depth direction are opened, the opening portion of the opening portion.
  • the positions of the upper ends can be aligned in the same way. As a result, once the user grasps the position of the upper end of one of the opening portions, the position of the upper end is visually confirmed each time even when the absorbent article is taken out from any opening portion.
  • the absorbent article can be easily taken out from the side surface portion without doing so.
  • the distance between the boundary line and the boundary line is the distance between the boundary line and the vertical weakening line on at least one side of the right surface portion and the left surface portion of the two vertical weakening lines in the rear surface portion.
  • the distance between the vertical weakening line on the rear surface side on the right surface portion or the left surface portion and the boundary line between the right surface portion or the left surface portion and the rear surface portion is the distance between the right surface portion side or the left surface portion on the rear surface portion.
  • the distance between the vertical weakening line on the side and the boundary line is the same.
  • the distance between the vertical weakening line on the front surface side of the right surface portion or the left surface portion and the boundary line is the width of each portion on both outer sides of the opening of the opening portion on the right surface portion or the left surface portion.
  • the distance between the vertical weakening line on the right side or the left side of the front surface portion and the boundary line is the width of each portion on both outer sides of the opening portion of the opening portion in the front surface portion.
  • the distance between the vertical weakening line on the rear surface side of the right surface portion or the left surface portion and the boundary line is the width of each portion on both outer sides of the opening of the opening portion on the right surface portion or the left surface portion.
  • the distance between the vertical weakening line on the right side or the left side of the rear surface portion and the boundary line is the width of both outer portions of the opening of the opening portion on the rear surface portion.
  • Both outer portions of the openings of each of these opened portions are necessary for maintaining the shape of each side surface portion after opening, and by extension, maintaining the shape of the package. Therefore, if the widths of these portions are not well balanced, it becomes difficult to maintain the shape of the side surface portion and the package after opening. Therefore, in this package, a predetermined same width is provided so that these widths do not differ greatly from side to side. This makes it easier to maintain the shape of the side surface and the package after opening. As a result, the shape of the opening of the opened portion can be maintained, and the ease of taking out the absorbent article can be maintained.
  • Aspect 21 It has a width direction, a depth direction, and a vertical direction, has a plurality of side surface portions including a front surface portion, a rear surface portion, a right surface portion, and a left surface portion, and at least one of the plurality of side surface portions includes an opening portion, and the opening portion is included.
  • the portion extends along the vertical direction and extends along the width direction or the depth direction and two vertical weakening lines arranged at intervals in the width direction or the depth direction.
  • a packaging bag capable of storing a plurality of absorbent articles, including a lateral weakening line connecting the upper ends of the weakening line in the vertical direction, having a transport direction, a transverse direction, and a thickness direction.
  • both sides in the transverse direction are folded in a valley fold toward the inside of the transverse direction, so that one side and the other side in the thickness direction can be obtained.
  • the right surface portion and the left surface portion are provided with a weakening line forming step of forming the two vertical weakening lines and the horizontal weakening line.
  • the position of the lower end of the two vertical weakening lines in the transport direction is the vertical direction parallel to the transport direction of the plurality of absorbent articles when the plurality of absorbent articles are stored in the packaging bag.
  • one weakening line forming blade forms a horizontal weakening line and two vertical weakening lines on the front and rear surfaces, and at the same time, a horizontal weakening line and two vertical weakening lines on the right side and the left side. Lines can be formed.
  • the weakening wire can be easily formed, the man-hours for forming the weakening wire can be reduced, and the cost can be reduced by reducing the manufacturing equipment and the like.
  • the packaging body according to the embodiment will be described.
  • “along" in a certain direction includes the direction in the range of ⁇ 30 ° with respect to the direction.
  • the end portion of a member or the like in a certain direction is a length of 1/5 (preferably 1/10) or less of the total length of the member or the like in the direction from the edge of the member in the direction. The range of the length.
  • FIG. 1 to 4 are schematic views showing a configuration example of the package 1 according to the embodiment.
  • FIG. 1 is a perspective view schematically showing a configuration example of the package 1
  • FIG. 2 is a front view schematically showing a configuration example of the package 1
  • FIG. 3 is a configuration example of the package 1. It is a right side view schematically shown.
  • FIG. 4 is a developed view schematically showing the packaging bag 2 of the packaging body 1.
  • the package 1 has a width direction W, a depth direction D, and a vertical direction T that are orthogonal to each other.
  • the package 1 includes a plurality of absorbent articles 3 and a packaging bag 2 including a plurality of side surface portions and accommodating the plurality of absorbent articles 3.
  • the plurality of side surface portions include a front surface portion 11, a rear surface portion 12, a right surface portion 13, and a left surface portion 14.
  • the front surface portion 11 and the rear surface portion 12 are portions constituting the front surface and the rear surface of the package 1 (packaging bag 2), and the direction from one of the front surface portion 11 and the rear surface portion 12 to the other is the depth direction D.
  • the right surface portion 13 and the left surface portion 14 are portions constituting the right surface and the left surface of the package 1 (packaging bag 2), and the direction from one of the right surface portion 13 and the left surface portion 14 to the other is the width direction W.
  • the vertical direction T is the extending direction of the cylinder composed of the front surface portion 11, the right surface portion 13, the rear surface portion 12, and the left surface portion 14 adjacent to each other. Since the plurality of side surface portions are not only the side surface portions of the packaging bag 2 but also the side surface portions of the packaging body 1, it can be said that the packaging body 1 has a plurality of side surface portions.
  • the packaging body 1 (packaging bag 2) has a corner portion 19 at a portion where side surface portions adjacent to each other intersect with each other. That is, a portion where the front surface portion 11 and the right surface portion 13 intersect, a portion where the front surface portion 11 and the left surface portion 14 intersect, a portion where the rear surface portion 12 and the right surface portion 13 intersect, and a portion where the rear surface portion 12 and the left surface portion 14 intersect.
  • Each of the above has a corner portion 19.
  • the corner portion 19 is a region including the boundary line CL.
  • the boundary line CL is located at the center of the corner portion 19 along the surface of the package 1 (packaging bag 2) in the direction parallel to the bottom surface portion 16 (described later).
  • FIG. 4 is a view obtained by cutting the packaging bag 2 at the boundary line CL between the rear surface portion 12 and the left surface portion 14 and developing the packaging bag 2.
  • the packaging bag 2 is composed of a sheet member made of a synthetic resin such as polyethylene, polypropylene, and polyethylene terephthalate.
  • a plurality of absorbent articles 3 are stacked vertically in a state where they are stacked vertically in the width direction W and arranged in a row, and are stored in three layers in the vertical direction T.
  • the method of storing the plurality of absorbent articles 3 in the packaging bag 2 is not particularly limited and is arbitrary.
  • the plurality of absorbent articles 3 may be one step in the vertical direction T, two or four steps or more, may be stacked in the depth direction D, and may be arranged in two or more rows in each step. May be good.
  • the absorbent article 3 is a urine collecting pad.
  • the type of the absorbent article 3 is not limited to this example, and other absorbent articles may be used as long as they do not deviate from the scope of the present invention.
  • Other absorbent articles include sanitary napkins, incontinence pads, pants-type diapers, tape-type diapers, and the like.
  • the size of the folded absorbent article 3 contained in the package 1 is not particularly limited, and examples thereof include 5 to 30 cm ⁇ 5 to 40 cm ⁇ 1 to 10 cm.
  • the package 1 (packaging bag 2) has a rectangular parallelepiped shape, and therefore each of the side surface portions thereof, that is, the front surface portion 11, the rear surface portion 12, the right surface portion 13, and the left surface portion 14 is rectangular. Has the shape of.
  • the package 1 since the package 1 is mainly composed of a easily deformable sheet member and an absorbent article, it does not have to have a strict rectangular parallelepiped shape, and each side surface portion has a strict rectangular shape. You don't have to. For example, a part or all of the side surface portion or a corner, as in a state where the absorbent article 3 is compressed and stored in the packaging bag 2, and then the absorbent article 3 expands and the packaging bag 2 extends from the inside.
  • Part or all of the portion 19 may have a curved surface, be rounded, or have irregularities.
  • the size of the package 1 (packaging bag 2) is not particularly limited, but for example, the length in the width direction W is 10 to 80 cm, the length in the depth direction D is 10 to 80 cm, and the length in the vertical direction T is 10. ⁇ 100 cm can be mentioned.
  • the package 1 (packaging bag 2) extends along the width direction W at each of the front surface portion 11 and the rear surface portion 12, and extends along the depth direction D at each of the right surface portion 13 and the left surface portion 14.
  • a first weakening line 21 formed respectively
  • a second weakening line 22 formed so as to straddle each corner portion 19.
  • the weakening lines such as the first weakening line 21 and the second weakening line 22 are a portion through which the sheet member of the packaging bag 2 is penetrated in the thickness direction or a portion thinly cut in the thickness direction and half-cut (the portion).
  • a plurality of "weakened portions" are intermittently arranged in a predetermined direction, and are exemplified by perforations.
  • the depth direction D A first weakening line 21 extending along the line 21 is formed.
  • the left surface portion 14 in the upper portion in the vertical direction T from the vicinity of the corner portion 19 between the left surface portion 14 and the front surface portion 11 to the vicinity of the corner portion 19 between the left surface portion 14 and the rear surface portion 12, the depth direction D A first weakening line 21 extending along the line 21 is formed.
  • the second weakening line 22 is formed. Similarly, straddling the corner portion 19 between the front surface portion 11 and the left surface portion 14, from the end portion of the front surface portion 11 on the left surface portion 14 side in the width direction W to the end of the left surface portion 14 on the front surface portion 11 side in the depth direction D.
  • the second weakening line 22 is formed up to the portion.
  • the second weakening line 22 is formed. Straddling the corner portion 19 of the rear surface portion 12 and the left surface portion 14, from the end portion of the rear surface portion 12 on the left surface portion 14 side in the width direction W to the end portion of the left surface portion 14 on the rear surface portion 12 side in the depth direction D. The second weakening line 22 is formed.
  • the package 1 (packaging bag 2) is in the vertical direction T from the first weakening line 21 and the second weakening line 22 of the front surface portion 11, the rear surface portion 12, the right surface portion 13 and the left surface portion 14, respectively. It further includes an upper surface portion 15 formed by the upper portion.
  • the upper surface portion 15 includes a coupling portion 17 in which the upper end portions of the front surface portion 11, the rear surface portion 12, the right surface portion 13, and the left surface portion 14 are heat-sealed to each other in the vertical direction T.
  • the connecting portion 17 includes a handle portion 18 formed of a weakening line.
  • the package 1 (packaging bag 2) further has a bottom surface portion 16 in which the lower end portions of each of the front surface portion 11, the rear surface portion 12, the right surface portion 13, and the left surface portion 14 are heat-sealed to each other in the vertical direction T. doing.
  • the package 1 (packaging bag 2) encloses a plurality of absorbent articles 3 by an upper surface portion 15, a front surface portion 11, a rear surface portion 12, a right surface portion 13, a left surface portion 14, and a bottom surface portion 16.
  • the packaging body 1 may or may not have an opening portion 20 in at least one of the front surface portion 11, the rear surface portion 12, the right surface portion 13, and the left surface portion 14.
  • the opening portion 20 includes two vertical weakening lines 25 which are weakening lines and a horizontal weakening line 24.
  • the two vertical weakening lines 25 extend along the vertical direction T and are arranged at intervals in the width direction W or the depth direction D.
  • the lateral weakening line 24 extends along the width direction W or the depth direction D, and connects the upper ends of the two vertical weakening lines 25 in the vertical direction T.
  • the opening portion 20 may be opened and the absorbent article 3 may be taken out by separating the horizontal weakening line 24 and the two vertical weakening lines 25.
  • FIG. 5 is a schematic diagram showing a configuration example of the first weakening line 21 and the second weakening line 22 of the package 1 according to the embodiment. Specifically, it is a schematic diagram which shows the positional relationship between the 1st weakening line 21 and the 2nd weakening line 22 in a corner portion 19 and its vicinity along the surface of a package 1 (packaging bag 2).
  • the adjacent first weakening lines 21 are separated from each other at the corners 19. Therefore, if the distance between the adjacent first weakening lines 21 at the corner portion 19 is d2, at least d2> 0.
  • the adjacent first weakening line 21 and the second weakening line 22 are separated from each other. Therefore, if the distance between the adjacent first weakening line 21 and the second weakening line 22 is d1, at least d1> 0.
  • the distance d1 between the adjacent second weakening line 22 and the first weakening line 21 is shorter than the distance d2 between the adjacent first weakening lines (d1 ⁇ d2). That is, the distance d1 between the adjacent second weakening line 22 and the first weakening line 21 is relatively short.
  • the distances d1 and d2 are the shortest distances measured along the surface of the packaging bag 2.
  • the extension line L0 at the end of the second weakening line 22 intersects the first weakening line 21 adjacent to the end of the second weakening line 22.
  • the tangent line at the end of the second weakening line 22 is an extension line L0.
  • the size of d1 is 0.1 to 4 cm, preferably 0.5 to 3 cm.
  • the lower limit is a viewpoint of suppressing propagation of the first weakening line 21 to the second weakening line 22 when it is unnecessary, and the upper limit is the viewpoint that the disconnection of the second weakening line 22 is required to the first weakening line 21. This is a viewpoint to prevent it from becoming difficult to propagate (described later).
  • the size of d2 is 2 to 15 cm, preferably 3 to 10 cm.
  • the lower limit is a viewpoint of suppressing the disconnection of the first weakening line 21 from propagating to the adjacent first weakening line 21, and the upper limit is a viewpoint of suppressing the disconnection of the weakening line 21 from becoming difficult when it is necessary.
  • the length d3 of the second weakening line 22 measured along the surface of the packaging bag 2 is 2 to 15 cm.
  • FIG. 6 is a schematic view showing a mode in which the package 1 according to the embodiment is completely or partially opened.
  • the first weakening line 21 and the second weakening line 22 are separated from each other on all of the plurality of side surface portions.
  • the first cutting line 21a and the second cutting line 22a are formed on all of the plurality of side surface portions, the upper surface portion 15 is removed, and the opening OP is formed.
  • the user can remove the absorbent article 3 from the opening OP.
  • FIG. 6A in the embodiment in which the package 1 is completely opened, the first weakening line 21 and the second weakening line 22 are separated from each other on all of the plurality of side surface portions.
  • the first cutting line 21a and the second cutting line 22a are formed on all of the plurality of side surface portions, the upper surface portion 15 is removed, and the opening OP is formed.
  • the user can remove the absorbent article 3 from the opening OP.
  • the package 1 in the embodiment in which the package 1 is partially opened, in a part of the plurality of side surface portions (example: front surface portion 11, right surface portion 13 and left surface portion 14),
  • the first weakening line 21 and the second weakening line 22 are separated.
  • the first cutting line 21a and the second cutting line 22a are formed on a part of the plurality of side surface portions (example: front surface portion 11, right surface portion 13 and left surface portion 14), and an opening OP is formed.
  • the user can remove the absorbent article 3 from the opening OP.
  • the user grips the handle portion 18 of the joint portion 17 with the hand H in a state where the upper surface portion 15 is coupled to the other part of the plurality of side surface portions (eg, the rear surface portion 12).
  • the package 1 can be carried.
  • FIG. 7 is a schematic diagram showing the action and effect of the package according to the embodiment. This figure mainly shows the state of separation at the first weakening line 21 and the second weakening line 22 at the corner portion 19 along the surface of the package 1 (packaging bag 2).
  • the second weakening line 22 is formed in the vicinity of the first weakening line 21 at the corner portion 19, and the extension line L0 at the end of the second weakening line 22 is adjacent to the second weakening line 22. It intersects the weakening line 21. Therefore, in the embodiment in which the package 1 is completely or partially opened, as shown by the arrow in FIG. 7A, the user cuts off the second weakening line 22 at the corner portion 19 and separates the second weakening line 22 as it is. The force of the first weakening line 21 can be easily transferred to the first weakening line 21, and the first weakening line 21 can be easily separated.
  • the first cutting line 21a of the first weakening line 21 can be easily formed continuously as it is. Thereby, by separating the required number of the first weakening wires 21 and the second weakening wires 22, the upper surface portion 15 of the packaging body can be easily removed from the packaging body 1, and the upper surface portion 15 of the packaging body can be easily separated. be able to.
  • a plurality of first weakening lines 21 provided over the entire circumference of the package 1 are continuously provided. Not provided. That is, in the corner portion 19, the adjacent first weakening lines 21 are separated from each other at a predetermined distance d2. Further, the plurality of second weakening lines 22 provided in the full-width portion 19 are separated from each other by a predetermined distance d1 from the adjacent first weakening line 21 among the plurality of first weakening lines 21.
  • the weight of the absorbent article 3 separates the separating force for opening.
  • Separation may occur or proceed from the first weakening line to the first weakening line 21 which is not separated and remains connected.
  • the separation of the first weakening line 21 (first cutting line 21a) is indicated by the X mark of the corner portion 19 (P1 and P2). It stops at the position shown) and does not shift to the adjacent second weakening line 22 or the first weakening line 21. Therefore, the upper surface portion 15 does not come off from the package 1. As a result, the user can grip the upper surface portion 15 and carry the package 1 to another place (the carrying durability is increased).
  • the package 1 adjusts the degree of separation of the upper surface portion 15 of the package 1 according to various modes of use, that is, the controllability of the degree of opening of the package 1 and the package.
  • the upper surface portion 15 of 1 can be completely or partially easily separated, that is, the ease of opening the package 1 can be achieved at the same time.
  • the relationship between the first weakening line 21 and the second weakening line 22 in the package 1 is 0 ⁇ d1 ⁇ d2, and the intersection of the extension line L0 and the first weakening line 21 is present. It is listed. In other words, the relationship can be said to be as follows. That is, the second weakening line 22 has a plurality of absorbent articles 3 when the upper surface portion 15 is gripped and the package 1 is lifted after the separation of at least one adjacent first weakening line 21 is performed. Due to the weight of, the separation of the first weakening line 21 is formed at a position that cannot be reached even if it propagates to the corner portion 19.
  • FIG. 8 is a schematic diagram showing the action and effect of the package according to the embodiment.
  • This figure shows, as an example, a state of separation at the first weakening line 21 at the right surface portion 13 and the corner portion 19 between the right surface portion 13 and the rear surface portion 12.
  • a plurality of lines parallel to the depth direction D and spaced apart in the vertical direction T are drawn on the surface of the right surface portion 13.
  • the state of the right surface portion 13 is three-dimensionally expressed by changes such as distortion of the plurality of lines.
  • the present package 1 is provided with a first weakening line 21 formed so as to extend along the depth direction D on the right surface portion 13, and is formed so as to straddle the corner portion 19.
  • the second weakening line 22 is provided.
  • the first weakening line 21 of the front surface portion 11 and the right surface portion 13 is separated, and after the first cutting line 21a is formed, the upper surface portion 15 is formed. Is gripped and the package 1 is lifted. At that time, the weight of the absorbent article 3 may cause the first cutting line 21a to propagate toward the corner portion 19.
  • the first cutting line 21a propagates in the direction of the first weakening line 21 as it is, it becomes like the first cutting line 21a0 shown in FIG.
  • the first cutting line 21a is obliquely upward from the direction of the first weakening line 21 due to the relationship between the force that lifts the upper surface portion 15 upward and the force that pushes the right surface portion 13 downward due to the weight of the absorbent article 3. It propagates to the first cutting line 21aX shown in FIG.
  • the corner portion 19 does not have the second weakening line 22, the propagation of the first cutting line 21a can be stopped substantially in the middle of the corner portion 19.
  • the weakening line is not provided at the corner portion 19, it is difficult to remove the upper surface portion 15 when it is desired to remove the weakening line.
  • the first weakening line 21 and the first weakening line 21 are spaced apart from each other in the vertical direction T. It is conceivable to form a second weakening line 121 extending in parallel in the depth direction D (Patent Document 1).
  • the second weakening line 121 is separated, and the separation further propagates to the first weakening line 21 of the rear surface portion 12. There is a risk of doing so. In that case, in the end, all the weakening lines may be separated and the upper surface portion 15 may be removed. Therefore, in the present package 1, as shown in FIG. 8, the second weakening line 22 of the corner portion 19 is formed at a position that cannot be reached even if the disconnection of the first weakening line 21 propagates to the corner portion 19. There is.
  • the package 1 can achieve both the ease of opening the package 1 and the controllability of the degree of opening of the package 1.
  • FIG. 9 is a schematic diagram showing a configuration example of the first weakening line and the second weakening line according to the embodiment. Specifically, it is a schematic diagram which shows the positional relationship between the 1st weakening line 21 and the 2nd weakening line 22 in a corner portion 19 and its vicinity along the surface of a package 1 (packaging bag 2).
  • at least the end of the second weakening line 22 may overlap with the adjacent first weakening line 21 in the vertical direction T. That is, the adjacent second weakening line 22 and the first weakening line 21 may overlap by the length dL (> 0) in the vertical direction T.
  • the dL is preferably 0.1 cm or more, and more preferably 0.5 cm or more, from the viewpoint of reliably propagating the disconnection of the second weakening line 22 to the first weakening line 21.
  • the dL is preferably 4 cm or less, and more preferably 3 cm or less, from the viewpoint of sufficiently separating the adjacent first weakening lines 21 from each other.
  • the extension line L0 at least at the end of the second weakening line 22 may intersect the adjacent first weakening line 21 at an acute angle. That is, if the angle formed by the extension line L0 and the first weakening line 21 is ⁇ , (0 ⁇ ) ⁇ ⁇ 90 ° may be used. As a result, when the user tries to open the package 1 and separates the second weakening line 22, the force of the disconnection is applied to the sharp inclination (angle) of the second weakening line 22 with respect to the first weakening line 21. Along ⁇ ), the second weakening line 22 can be smoothly transitioned to the first weakening line 21.
  • is preferably 15 ° or more, and more preferably 30 ° or more, from the viewpoint of reliably propagating the disconnection of the second weakening line 22 to the first weakening line 21. Further, ⁇ is preferably 80 ° or less, more preferably 70 ° or less, from the viewpoint of smoothly propagating the disconnection of the second weakening line 22 to the first weakening line 21.
  • the first weakening line 21 is a plurality of weakening portions 21w arranged intermittently and a plurality of non-weakening portions 21v located between the adjacent weakening portions 21w. It may be composed of.
  • the distance d1 between the adjacent first weakening line 21 and the second weakening line 22 may be longer than the distance between the weakening portions 21w constituting the first weakening line 21. That is, if the distance between the weakened portions 21w is d21, d21 ⁇ d1 may be used.
  • the upper surface portion 15 is gripped and the package 1 is carried, even if the absorbent article 3 is heavy, the first weakening line 21 is separated. 2 It is difficult to propagate to the weakening line 22, and it is easy to stop at the corner portion 19. As a result, the upper surface portion 15 can be gripped and the package 1 can be stably carried (the carrying durability is increased).
  • FIG. 10 is a schematic diagram showing a configuration example of the first weakening line and the second weakening line according to the embodiment. Specifically, it is a schematic diagram which shows the positional relationship between the 1st weakening line 21 and the 2nd weakening line 22 in a corner portion 19 and its vicinity along the surface of a package 1 (packaging bag 2).
  • (A) to (d) show variations in the configuration when the second weakening line 22 is located above the first weakening line 21 in the vertical direction T, and (e) to (f) are the second. It shows a variation of the configuration when the weakening line 22 is located below the first weakening line 21 in the vertical direction T.
  • the second weakening line 22 is in the vertical direction with the central portion 22p in the direction along the surface of the package 1 (packaging bag 2) in the second weakening line 22 as the apex. It may have a convex shape ((a) to (d)) on the upper side of the T or a convex shape ((e) to (h)) on the lower side. In this case, in the second weakening line 22, the portion on the side of the adjacent first weakening line 21 has a shape that asymptotes to the first weakening line 21.
  • the force of the disconnection is applied along the portion of the second weakening line 22 on the first weakening line 21 side.
  • the transition from the second weakening line 22 to the first weakening line 21 can be made more smoothly. Thereby, the separation at both weakening lines can be performed more easily, and the package can be opened more easily.
  • the second weakening line 22 of (a) and (e) is arch-shaped, and the second weakening line 22 of (b) and (f) is a (rounded) triangular shape, and (c),
  • the second weakening line 22 of (g) has a (rounded) triangular shape, but the second weakening line 22 and the first weakening line 21 do not overlap in the vertical direction T.
  • the second weakening line 22 of (d) and (h) is rectangular. However, even in the case of the arch type or the rectangular type, the second weakening line 22 and the first weakening line 21 do not have to overlap in the vertical direction T.
  • the shape of the second weakening line 22 is not limited to this example, and may be another shape, a semicircular shape, a semi-elliptical shape, a trapezoidal shape, or the like. Further, each second weakening line 22 may be line-symmetrical with respect to the boundary line CL. In that case, when the vicinity of the boundary line CL is pinched with a finger to separate the second weakening line 22, the second weakening lines 22 on both side surfaces sandwiching the boundary line CL can be broken together at the same time. ..
  • the second weakening line 22 has an arch shape and thus has a substantially arc shape ((a), (e)).
  • the weight of the absorbent article 3 causes the first weakening lines 21 to be separated from each other adjacent to each other. Even if it propagates to the 2 weakening line 22, the disconnecting force is dispersed in the tangential direction at each portion of the 2nd weakening line 22, and the disconnection of the 2nd weakening line 22 becomes difficult to proceed. As a result, the upper surface portion 15 can be gripped and the package 1 can be stably carried (the carrying durability is increased).
  • the first weakening line 21 is at the same position as the upper edge 3TE1 of the plurality of absorbent articles 3 in the vertical direction T or above the edge 3TE1. It may be formed at the position of.
  • the second weakening line 22 is formed at a position above the first weakening line 21 in the vertical direction T. Therefore, the position of the second weakening line 22 does not overlap with the position of the absorbent article 3 of the package 1. Therefore, even if the package 1 is inflated by the absorbent article 3, the user can easily pick the vicinity of the second weakening line 22, for example, without being affected by the inflated portion.
  • the second weakening line 22 can be easily separated. That is, the package 1 can be easily opened.
  • a handle portion 18 provided on the upper portion of the upper surface portion 15 may be further provided.
  • the upper surface portion 15 can be gripped by the handle portion 18 and the package 1 can be easily carried.
  • the weight of the absorbent article 3 may cause the remaining portion of the outer periphery of the upper surface portion 15 to be separated, and the upper surface portion 15 may be separated from the package body 1. .
  • the package 1 has the above-mentioned structure, the partially bonded upper surface portion 15 does not separate.
  • FIG. 11 is a schematic view showing an example of a method for manufacturing a package according to an embodiment.
  • this manufacturing method as an example, a manufacturing method of the gusset type package 1 will be described.
  • this manufacturing method has a transport direction MD, a transverse direction CD, and a thickness direction TD (not shown) that are orthogonal to each other in the transport of materials in each step.
  • a packaging bag 2 capable of storing a plurality of absorbent articles 3 is formed.
  • the method for forming the packaging bag 2 includes a side surface forming step and a weakening line forming step.
  • both sides of the transverse CD in the tubular resin sheet member 50 (FIG. 11 (a)) extending along the transport direction MD are folded in a valley fold toward the inside of the transverse CD. ..
  • the side surface forming step is folded between the front surface portion 11 and the rear surface portion 12 located on one side and the other side of the thickness direction TD, respectively, and the front surface portion 11 and the rear surface portion 12, and is folded on the right side of the transverse direction CD.
  • the right side portion 13 and the left side portion 14 located on the left side, respectively (FIG. 11 (b)).
  • the front surface portion 11 and the rear surface portion 12 overlap in the thickness direction TD
  • the right side portion and the right surface portion 13 of the front surface portion 11 and the rear surface portion 12 overlap in the thickness direction TD
  • the left side portion of the rear surface portion 12 and the left surface portion 14 overlap with each other in the thickness direction TD.
  • the weakening line forming blade (not shown) is pressed from one side of the front surface portion 11 and the rear surface portion 12 toward the other side (in the thickness direction TD).
  • the folded sheet member 50 is sandwiched between a roll having a weakening line forming blade and an anvil roll.
  • the weakening line forming step forms the first weakening line 21 and the second weakening line 22 extending along the transverse direction CD on the front surface portion 11 and the rear surface portion 12.
  • the first weakening line 21 and the second weakening line 21 and the second weakening line 21 extending along the transverse direction CD are located between the front surface portion 11 and the rear surface portion 12 and overlap the right surface portion 13 and the left surface portion 14 in the thickness direction TD.
  • the weakening line 22 is formed.
  • the relationship between the first weakening line 21 and the second weakening line 22 is 0 ⁇ d1 ⁇ d2, and the extension line L0 and the first weakening line 21. It is formed to satisfy the intersection with.
  • the second weakening line 22 has a plurality of absorbent articles 3 when the upper surface portion 15 is gripped and the package 1 is lifted after the separation of at least one adjacent first weakening line 21 is performed. Due to the weight, the cutoff of the first weakening line 21 may be formed at a position where it cannot be reached even if it propagates to the corner portion 19.
  • the weakening line forming step is further separated from one side of the front surface portion 11 and the rear surface portion 12 toward the other side (in the thickness direction TD). Press the weak line forming blade (not shown).
  • the sheet member 50 that has been folded and formed with the first weakening wire 21 and the second weakening wire 22 is sandwiched between a roll having another weakening wire forming blade and an anvil roll.
  • two vertical weakening lines 25 extending in the transport direction MD and a horizontal weakening line 24 extending in the transverse direction CD are formed on the front surface portion 11 and the rear surface portion 12.
  • the weakening line forming step is located between the front surface portion 11 and the rear surface portion 12, and has two vertical lines extending in the transport direction MD on the right surface portion 13 and the left surface portion 14 overlapping the thickness direction TD.
  • the weakening line 25 and the lateral weakening line 24 extending in the transverse direction CD are formed.
  • the position of the lower end of the transport direction MD on the two vertical weakening lines 25 is parallel to the transport direction MD in the plurality of absorbent articles 3 when the packaging bag 2 contains the plurality of absorbent articles 3.
  • Two vertical weakening lines 25 and horizontal weakening lines 24 may be formed so as to be higher than the position of the lower end of the vertical direction T and lower than the position in the middle of the vertical direction T in the plurality of absorbent articles 3.
  • either the step of forming the first weakening line 21 and the second weakening line 22 or the step of forming the two vertical weakening lines 25 and the horizontal weakening line 24 may be performed first. , May be done at the same time.
  • the folded sheet member 50 is sandwiched between one roll having a weakening line forming blade and another weakening line forming blade and an anvil roll.
  • the handle portion 18 may be formed.
  • the packaging bag 2 is formed (FIG. 11 (c)).
  • the packaging bag 2 of FIG. 11C is cut at the boundary line CL between the rear surface portion 12 and the left surface portion 14 and unfolded, the result is as shown in FIG.
  • the width in the direction parallel to the bottom surface portion 16 along the surface of the packaging bag 2 is the same as the width of the right surface portion 13, and is along the surface of the packaging bag 2.
  • the center in the direction parallel to the bottom surface portion 16 is a rectangular region which is a boundary line CL between the right surface portion 13 and the front surface portion 11.
  • the second weakening line straddling the boundary line CL is axisymmetric with respect to the boundary line CL.
  • the first weakening line, the horizontal weakening line and the vertical weakening line of the front surface portion 11 adjacent to both sides of the boundary line CL and the first weakening line, the horizontal weakening line and the vertical weakening line of the right surface portion 13 are the boundary line CL. It is line symmetric with respect to. The same applies to the region STA (not shown) including the other boundary line CL.
  • the width thereof is the same as the width of the right surface portion 13, and the second weakening line straddling the boundary line CL, the adjacent rear surface portions 12 and the right.
  • the first weakening line, the horizontal weakening line, and the vertical weakening line of the face portion 13 are line-symmetrical with respect to the boundary line CL.
  • the width thereof is the same as the width of the left surface portion 14, and the second weakening line straddling the boundary line CL, the adjacent front surface portions 11 and the left
  • the first weakening line, the horizontal weakening line, and the vertical weakening line of the face portion 14 are line-symmetrical with respect to the boundary line CL.
  • the width thereof is the same as the width of the left surface portion 14, and the second weakening line straddling the boundary line CL, the adjacent rear surface portions 12 and the left
  • the first weakening line, the horizontal weakening line, and the vertical weakening line of the face portion 14 are line-symmetrical with respect to the boundary line CL.
  • the bottom surface side portion of the formed packaging bag 2 is sealed by heat fusion to form the bottom surface portion 16.
  • a plurality of absorbent articles 3 are stored from the upper surface side of the packaging bag 2.
  • the upper surface side portion of the packaging bag 2 is sealed by heat fusion to form the joint portion 17.
  • the gusset type package 1 is formed.
  • the package 1 may be a gusset type.
  • the right surface portion 13 and the left surface portion 14 are portions folded in a valley fold on the right side and the left side in the width direction W between the front surface portion 11 and the rear surface portion 12, respectively.
  • the second weakening line 22 of the corner portion 19 between the right surface portion 13 and the front surface portion 11 may have a shape symmetrical with respect to the boundary line CL between the right surface portion 13 and the front surface portion 11.
  • the second weakening line 22 of the corner portion 19 between the right surface portion 13 and the rear surface portion 12 may have a shape symmetrical with respect to the boundary line CL between the right surface portion 13 and the rear surface portion 12.
  • the second weakening line 22 of the corner portion 19 between the left surface portion 14 and the front surface portion 11 may have a shape symmetrical with respect to the boundary line CL between the left surface portion 14 and the front surface portion 11.
  • the second weakening line 22 of the corner portion 19 between the left surface portion 14 and the rear surface portion 12 may have a shape symmetrical with respect to the boundary line CL between the left surface portion 14 and the rear surface portion 12.
  • the second weakening line 22 of the above and the second weakening line 22 of each of the front surface portion 11 and the rear surface portion 12 can be broken together at the same time. As a result, both second weakening lines can be separated more easily, and the package 1 as a whole can be opened more easily.
  • the package 1 may be a gusset type.
  • the first weakening line 21 is formed at the same position as the upper edge 3TE1 of the plurality of absorbent articles 3 housed in the package 1 in the vertical direction T or at a position higher than the edge 3TE1. You may.
  • the second weakening line 22 is located above the first weakening line 21 in the vertical direction T. Therefore, the position of the second weakening line 22 in the package 1 does not overlap with the position of the stored absorbent article 3.
  • the user can easily, for example, in the vicinity of the second weakening line 22 without being affected by the inflated portion.
  • the second weakening line 22 can be easily separated. That is, the package can be easily opened.
  • the package 1 (packaging bag 2) includes an opening portion 20 on at least one of the plurality of side surface portions.
  • the differences from the first embodiment will be mainly described.
  • the packaging body 1 (packaging bag 2) is provided with an opening portion 20 on at least one of a plurality of side surface portions. As shown in FIGS. 1 to 4, the opening portion 20 extends along the vertical direction T, and has two vertical weakening lines 25 arranged at intervals in the width direction W or the depth direction D, and the width direction W or. It includes a horizontal weakening line 24 extending along the depth direction D and connecting the upper ends of the vertical weakening lines 25 in the vertical direction T to each other.
  • the weakening lines such as the vertical weakening line 25 and the horizontal weakening line 24 are a portion through which the sheet member of the packaging bag 2 is penetrated in the thickness direction or a portion thinly cut in the thickness direction and half-cut (hereinafter referred to as a half-cut portion).
  • a plurality of "weakened parts") are intermittently arranged in a predetermined direction, and are exemplified by perforations. By pulling the portions on both sides of the weakening line so as to separate them from each other, they can be easily separated from each other along the weakening line. Then, by separating the horizontal weakening line 24 and the two vertical weakening lines 25, the opening portion 20 can be opened and the absorbent article 3 can be taken out.
  • the opening portion 20 is included in each of the front surface portion 11, the rear surface portion 12, the right surface portion 13, and the left surface portion 14.
  • Each of the front surface portion 11 and the rear surface portion 12 extends along the vertical direction T, two vertical weakening lines 25 arranged at intervals in the width direction W, and two extending along the width direction W.
  • each of the right surface portion 13 and the left surface portion 14 extends along the vertical direction T, two vertical weakening lines 25 arranged at intervals in the depth direction D, and two extending along the depth direction D.
  • a horizontal weakening line 24 that connects the upper ends of the vertical weakening line 25 in the vertical direction T.
  • the positions H1D and H2D of the lower end of the vertical direction T on the two vertical weakening lines 25 are higher than the position HAD of the lower end 3TE2 of the vertical direction T in the plurality of absorbent articles 3, and the plurality of absorbent articles It is lower than the position HAM in the middle of the vertical direction T in 3. Therefore, when the opened portion 20 is opened, the lower portion of the absorbent article 3 in the vertical direction T remains covered with the packaging bag 2, and the portion above the side portion (half or more portion). Will be exposed.
  • the position H1D of the lower end of the vertical direction T on the two vertical weakening lines 25 of the front surface portion 11 is higher than the position HAD of the lower end 3TE2 of the vertical direction T in the plurality of absorbent articles 3.
  • the distance between the position H1D at the lower end of the vertical weakening line 25 and the position HAD at the lower end 3TE2 of the absorbent article 3 is set to d11 (> 0), and the position HAD at the lower end 3TE2 of the absorbent article 3 and the upper end 3TE1.
  • the position H2D of the lower end of the vertical direction T on the two vertical weakening lines 25 of the right surface portion 13 is the lower end 3TE2 of the vertical direction T in the plurality of absorbent articles 3. It is higher than the position HAD and lower than the position HAM in the middle of the vertical direction T in the plurality of absorbent articles 3.
  • the distance between the position H2D at the lower end of the vertical weakening line 25 and the position HAD at the lower end 3TE2 of the absorbent article 3 is d21 (> 0), d21 ⁇ dA0 / 2.
  • d21 ⁇ dA0 / 2.
  • the plurality of absorbent articles 3 stacked in a plurality of stages in the vertical direction T are opened.
  • the portion 20 is formed.
  • the opening portion 20 is formed so as to cover a part of the upper surface portion (including the upper end 3TE1) of the plurality of absorbent articles 3 in the state of being stored in the packaging bag 2 in the vertical direction T.
  • the lateral weakening line 24 of the opening portion 20 is formed in the portion 20U of the opening portion 20 that covers a part of the upper surface portion (including the upper end 3TE1) of the vertical direction T in the plurality of absorbent articles 3. Has been done. Therefore, when the opened portion 20 is opened and the portion 20U is removed, a part of the upper surface portion (including the upper end 3TE1) of the absorbent article 3 in the vertical direction T is exposed.
  • the opening portion 20 of the front surface portion 11 includes a portion 20U that covers a part of the upper surface portion (including the upper end 3TE1) of the vertical direction T in the plurality of absorbent articles 3.
  • the lateral weakening line 24 of the opening portion 20 of the front surface portion 11 is formed in the portion 20U of the opening portion 20.
  • the opening portion 20 of the right surface portion 13 covers a part of the upper surface portion (including the upper end 3TE1) of the plurality of absorbent articles 3 in the vertical direction T. Includes portion 20U.
  • the lateral weakening line 24 of the opening portion 20 of the right surface portion 13 is formed in the portion 20U of the opening portion 20.
  • the positions H1U and H2U are the positions of the lower ends of the horizontal weakening line 24 and also the positions of the upper ends of the vertical weakening line 25.
  • the package 1 may or may not be provided with the first weakening line 21 and the second weakening line 22 in each of the front surface portion 11, the rear surface portion 12, the right surface portion 13, and the left surface portion 14. May be good.
  • the package 1 (packaging bag 2) is provided with the first weakening wire 21 and the second weakening wire 22 on each side surface portion, the first weakening wire 21 and the second weakening wire 22 are, for example, in the first embodiment. As stated.
  • FIG. 12 is a schematic view showing a state in which the package 1 according to the embodiment is opened by the front surface portion 11 or the left surface portion 14.
  • the lateral weakening line 24 of the opening portion 20 is separated to form the horizontal cutting line 24a, and subsequently, the two vertical weakening lines 25 are separated. Separation is performed to form two vertical cutting lines 25a.
  • the opening OPA is formed, and the opening portion 20 of the front surface portion 11 is opened.
  • the opening OPA the lower portion of the absorbent article 3 in the vertical direction T is covered with the packaging bag 2, while the upper portion (more than half of the portion) is exposed.
  • the rear surface portion 12 is a schematic view showing a state in which the package 1 according to the embodiment is opened by the front surface portion 11 or the left surface portion 14.
  • the lateral weakening line 24 of the opening portion 20 is separated to form the horizontal cutting line 24a, and then two vertical weakening lines are continuously formed.
  • the 25 are separated to form two vertical cutting lines 25a.
  • the opening OPB is formed, and the opening portion 20 of the left surface portion 14 is opened.
  • the lower portion of the absorbent article 3 in the vertical direction T is covered with the packaging bag 2, while the upper portion (more than half of the portion) is exposed.
  • the user separates the horizontal weakening line 24 and the two vertical weakening lines 25 at the opening portion 20 of the packaging bag 2, and opens the opening OPA and / or the opening OPB in the packaging bag 2. To form. Then, the absorbent article 3 stored in the packaging bag 2 can be taken out from the opening OPA and / or the opening OPB. At that time, the position H1D and / or the position H2D of the lower end of the vertical direction T on the two vertical weakening lines 25 is higher than the position HAD of the lower end 3TE2 of the vertical direction T in the plurality of absorbent articles 3.
  • the lower portion of the absorbent article 3 is located below the lower end of the opening OPA and / or the opening OPB, and is protected by the packaging bag 2. It will be. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the absorbent article 3 from unintentionally falling out of the opening OPA and / or the opening OPB. Further, when the absorbent article 3 is taken out, it is possible to prevent another absorbent article 3 from unintentionally falling out of the opening OPA and / or the opening OPB. Further, the position H1D and / or the position H2D at the lower end of the vertical direction T on the two vertical weakening lines 25 is lower than the position HAM in the middle of the vertical direction T in the plurality of absorbent articles 3.
  • the upper half or more of the absorbent article 3 is located above the lower end of the opening OPA and / or the opening OPB, and the opening OPA and / or It will be exposed from the opening OPB. Therefore, when the absorbent article 3 is taken out, it can be prevented from being caught in the opening OPA and / or the opening OPB.
  • the absorption article 3 is suppressed from falling out from the opening OPA and / or the opening OPB, and the absorbent article 3 is taken out from the opening OPA and / or the opening OPB. Can be compatible with facilitating.
  • the relationship between d11, d21, and dA0 may be 0 ⁇ d11, d21 ⁇ dA0 ⁇ (1/2), but dA0 (1/20) ⁇ d11, d21 is preferable from the viewpoint of suppressing dropout. It is more preferably dA0 (2/20) ⁇ d11, d21, and even more preferably dA0 (3/20) ⁇ d11, d21.
  • the relationship between d11, d21 and dA0 is preferably d11, d21 ⁇ dA0 ⁇ (9/20), and more preferably d11, d21 ⁇ dA0 ⁇ (8/20) from the viewpoint of ease of extraction. , And more preferably d11, d21 ⁇ dA0 ⁇ (7/20).
  • the opening portion 20 is arranged in at least one of the front surface portion 11 and the rear surface portion 12, and in at least one of the right surface portion 13 and the left surface portion 14. It may have been done. That is, in the package 1, an opening portion 20 (front surface portion 11 or rear surface portion 12) facing the depth direction D and an opening portion 20 (right surface portion 13 or left surface portion 14) facing the width direction W are formed. There is. Therefore, the user can take out the absorbent article 3 from each of the opening OPA and the opening OPB facing in the width direction W and the depth direction D by opening both the opening portions 20. Therefore, even if the package 1 is placed at an arbitrary place, the absorbent article 3 can be easily taken out from the opening OPA or the opening OPB in either direction.
  • the opening portion 20 is the upper surface portion (including the upper end 3TE1) of the plurality of absorbent articles 3 in the state of being stored in the packaging bag 2 in the vertical direction T. It may have a portion 20U that covers a part of the above. In that case, the lateral weakening line 24 of the opening portion 20 is formed in the portion 20U. Therefore, when the opening portion 20 is opened from the lateral weakening line 24, the opening OPA and / or the opening opening OPA and / or so that the region from the upper surface portion to the side surface portion of the plurality of absorbent articles 3 stored in the packaging bag 2 is exposed.
  • the opening OPB can be formed.
  • each of the absorbent articles 3 can be easily seen by the opening OPA and / or the opening OPB, and the upper surface portion of the absorbent article 3 can be easily seen by the opening OPA and / or the opening OPA and / or the opening OPB. / Or it can be made difficult to get caught in the end on the upper surface portion 15 side of the opening OPB. Therefore, the absorbent article 3 can be more easily removed from the opening OPA and / or the opening OPB.
  • the plurality of absorbent articles 3 may be stacked in at least two stages in the vertical direction.
  • the position H1D and / or the position H2D of the lower end of the vertical direction T on the two vertical weakening lines 25 is the position of the lower end of the vertical direction T in the uppermost absorbent article 3 among the plurality of absorbent articles 3. It is higher than HAD and lower than the position HAM in the middle of the vertical direction T in the uppermost absorbent article 3. Therefore, the uppermost absorbent article 3 among the plurality of absorbent articles 3 may fall out from the opening OPA and / or the opening OPB, or may fall into the opening OPA and / or the opening OPB when taken out.
  • absorbent articles 3 can be taken out in order from the absorbent articles 3 in the upper stage, so that a part or all of the absorbent articles 3 is an opening OPA and / or an opening.
  • the absorbent article 3 can be easily taken out without spilling out from the OPB.
  • the unused absorbent article 3 in the lower stage is covered with the packaging bag 2 until it is taken out, its cleanliness can be maintained. As described above, in the package 1, the absorption article 3 is suppressed from falling out from the opening OPA and / or the opening OPB, and the absorbent article 3 is taken out from the opening OPA and / or the opening OPB. It is possible to maintain the cleanliness of the absorbent article 3 in the lower stage.
  • FIG. 13 is a schematic diagram showing a configuration example of a vertical weakening line and a horizontal weakening line according to an embodiment.
  • the distance L1 between the two vertical weakening lines 25 in the width direction W or the depth direction D is set on each of the plurality of side surface portions. It may be 30% or more and 80% or less of the length L0 of each of the plurality of side surface portions in the width direction W or the depth direction D. That is, the relationship between L1 and L0 is 0.3 ⁇ L1 / L0 ⁇ 0.8.
  • the length of the opening OPA and / or the opening OPB of the opening portion 20 is set to 30% to 80% of the length of the side surface portion, and the length of the portion other than the opening OPA and / or the opening OPB of the side surface portion is set. Is 70 to 20% of the length of the side surface portion.
  • the length of the opening OPA and / or the opening OPB of the opening portion 20 is set to 80% or less, the length of the portion other than the opening OPA and / or the opening OPB of the side surface portion becomes more than 20%. Therefore, the shape of the package 1 (packaging bag 2) can be made difficult to collapse. Therefore, the absorbent article 3 can be easily taken out from the side surface portion without breaking the overall shape of the packaging bag 2.
  • the relationship between L1 and L0 is preferably 0.35 ⁇ L1 / L0 ⁇ 0.75, and more preferably 0.4 ⁇ L1 / L0 ⁇ 0.7. Note that FIG. 13 shows the case of the right side portion 13 or the left side portion 14, but the same applies to the front side portion 11 and / or the rear side portion 12.
  • FIG. 14 is a schematic diagram showing a configuration example of a vertical weakening line and a horizontal weakening line according to an embodiment.
  • the lateral weakening line 24 may include a central lateral weakening line 24m located at the center and end lateral weakening lines 24e located on both sides of the central lateral weakening line 24m.
  • the central lateral weakening line 24m is composed of a plurality of central lateral weakening portions 24mw arranged intermittently and a plurality of central non-lateral weakening portions 24mv located between adjacent central lateral weakening portions 24mw. ..
  • the end lateral weakening line 24e is composed of a plurality of end lateral weakening portions 24ew arranged intermittently and a plurality of end non-laterally weakening portions 24ev located between adjacent end lateral weakening portions 24ew.
  • the vertical weakening line 25 is composed of a plurality of vertically weakening portions arranged intermittently and a plurality of non-vertical weakening portions located between adjacent vertical weakening portions (reference numerals omitted).
  • the pitch of the central lateral weakening line 24m is LP1
  • the lengths of the central lateral weakening portion 24mw and the central non-lateral weakening portion 24mv are LW1 and LV1, respectively.
  • the pitch of the end lateral weakening line 24e is LP2
  • the lengths of the end laterally weakening portion 24ew and the end non-laterally weakening portion 24ev are LW2 and LV2, respectively.
  • the pitch of the vertical weakening line 25 is the same as the pitch of the end horizontal weakening line 24e, and the lengths of the vertical weakening portion and the non-vertical weakening portion are the end horizontal weakening portion 24ew and the end non-horizontal weakening portion 24ev. Same as the length of.
  • the distance between the weakened portions (central horizontal weakened portion 24 mw) (the length LV1 of the central non-horizontal weakened portion 24 mv) is the distance between the weakened portions constituting each of the two vertical weakened lines 25 (the end portion is not). It may be shorter than the length LV2) of the laterally weakened portion 24 ev. That is, LV1 ⁇ LV2 may be satisfied.
  • the opening portion 20 when opening the opening portion 20, it is possible to easily put a finger in the central lateral weakening line 24m of the lateral weakening line 24. Thereby, the separation of the horizontal weakening line 24 can be easily started, and further, the separation of each of the two vertical weakening lines 25 can be easily performed following the separation of the horizontal weakening line 24. Therefore, the opening OPA and / or the opening OPB of the opening portion 20 can be easily formed, and the absorbent article 3 can be more easily taken out from the opening OPA and / or the opening OPB. Further, LW1 ⁇ LW2 may be used, or LP1 ⁇ LP2 may be used.
  • FIG. 14 shows the case of the right side portion 13 or the left side portion 14, but the same applies to the front side portion 11 and / or the rear side portion 12.
  • the vertical weakening line 25 and the horizontal weakening line 24 in the weakening line forming step, and the formation of the first weakening line 21 and the second weakening line 22 is an option.
  • Others are the same as the manufacturing method of the first embodiment.
  • FIG. 15 is a front view and a right side view schematically showing another configuration example of the package 1 according to the embodiment.
  • the front view and the right side view of another configuration example of the package 1 are drawn adjacent to each other.
  • at least one of the right surface portion 13 and the left surface portion 14, and at least one of the front surface portion 11 and the rear surface portion 12, the positions H2D and the positions H1D of the lower ends of the vertical weakening lines 25 on the two vertical weakening lines 25. May be the same.
  • the position H2D at the lower end of the two vertical weakening lines 25 on the right surface portion 13 and the position H1D at the lower end of the two vertical weakening lines 25 on the front surface portion 11 may be the same.
  • the position H2U and the position H1U at the upper end of T may be the same.
  • the position H2U at the upper end of the two vertical weakening lines 25 on the right surface portion 13 and the position H1U at the upper end of the two vertical weakening lines 25 on the front surface portion 11 may be the same.
  • the vertical weakening line 25 on the front surface 11 side of the two vertical weakening lines 25 on at least one of the right surface portion 13 and the left surface portion 14 and the right surface portion thereof is the distance d23 of at least the right surface portion 13 and the left surface portion 14 of the two vertical weakening lines 25 in the front surface portion 11.
  • the distance d13 between the vertical weakening line 25 on one side and the boundary line CL thereof may be the same.
  • the distance d23 between the vertical weakening line 25 on the front surface portion 11 side of the right surface portion 13 and the boundary line CL between the right surface portion 13 and the front surface portion 11 is the vertical weakening line 25 on the right surface portion 13 side of the front surface portion 11.
  • the boundary line CL and the distance d13 may be the same.
  • the distance d23 between the vertical weakening line 25 on the front surface portion 11 side of the right surface portion 13 or the left surface portion 14 and the boundary line CL is set on both outer sides of the opening OPB of the opening portion 20 of the right surface portion 13 or the left surface portion 14. The width of the part.
  • the distance d13 between the vertical weakening line 25 on the right surface portion 13 side or the left surface portion 14 side in the front surface portion 11 and the boundary line CL is the width of both outer portions of the opening OPA of the opening portion 20 in the front surface portion 11.
  • Both outer portions of the opening OPB and the opening OPA of the opening portion 20 are portions necessary for maintaining the shape of the side surface portion after opening and, by extension, maintaining the shape of the package 1. Therefore, if the widths of these portions are not well balanced, it becomes difficult to maintain the shape of the side surface portion and the package 1 after opening. Therefore, in this package 1, a predetermined same width is provided so that these widths do not differ greatly from side to side. This makes it easier to maintain the shape of the side surface portion and the package 1 after opening. As a result, the shapes of the opening OPB and the opening OPA of the opened portion are maintained, and the ease of taking out the absorbent article 3 can be maintained.
  • the distance between one and the boundary line CL between the rear surface portion 12 is the vertical weakening line 25 on at least one side of the right surface portion 13 and the left surface portion 14 of the two vertical weakening lines 25 in the rear surface portion 12.
  • the boundary line CL may be the same as the distance d13.
  • the distance d23 between the vertical weakening line 25 on the rear surface portion 12 side of the right surface portion 13 and the boundary line CL between the right surface portion 13 and the rear surface portion 12 is the vertical weakening line 25 on the right surface portion 13 side of the rear surface portion 12.
  • the boundary line CL and the distance may be the same.
  • the package 1 of the present invention is not limited to the above-described embodiment, and is applied by addition / replacement of other techniques without departing from the spirit and purpose of the present invention, as long as there is no technical contradiction. Is possible.

Landscapes

  • Engineering & Computer Science (AREA)
  • Mechanical Engineering (AREA)
  • Packages (AREA)
  • Bag Frames (AREA)
  • Packaging Of Annular Or Rod-Shaped Articles, Wearing Apparel, Cassettes, Or The Like (AREA)

Abstract

Provided is a package capable of providing both easiness of opening/closing of the package and controllability of the opening/closing degree of the package. The package (1): includes a front surface section (11), a back surface section (12), a right surface section (13), and a left surface section (14); contains absorbent articles (3); and has corner parts (19) respectively located at a part where the front surface section intersects with the right surface section, a part where the front surface section intersects with the left surface section, a part where the back surface section intersects with the right surface section, and a part where the back surface section intersects with the left surface section. The package 1 is provided with: first weakening lines (21) formed so as to extend along a width direction on the front surface section and the back surface section and extend along a depth direction on the the right surface section and the left surface section; and second weakening lines (22) formed across the corner parts. Adjacent first weakening lines are separated from each other at the corner parts, adjacent first weakening line and second weakening line are separated from each other, the distance between adjacent second weakening line and first weakening line is shorter than the distance between the adjacent first weakening lines, and an extension of an end part of each second weakening line intersects with the first weakening line adjacent to the end part of the second weakening line.

Description

包装体Package
 本発明は吸収性物品の包装体に関する。 The present invention relates to a package of an absorbent article.
 尿取りパッドのような吸収性物品を包装袋に収納した包装体が知られている。包装袋は、ミシン目のような弱め線を外面に備えている。使用者は、弱め線の切り離しを行って、包装袋に開口部を形成し、その開口部から包装袋に収納された吸収性物品を取り出す。 A package in which an absorbent article such as a urine absorbing pad is stored in a packaging bag is known. The packaging bag has a perforated line on the outside. The user cuts off the weakening line to form an opening in the packaging bag, and takes out the absorbent article stored in the packaging bag from the opening.
 そのような包装体として、例えば、特許文献1に、紙おむつ等の包装袋(包装体)が開示されている。この包装袋(包装体)には、上開口部のシールラインよりも下方で充填収容される被包装物の上面またはその近傍に至るまでの区間で、包装袋(包装体)の底面と概ね平行な破断線(弱め線)が付設されている。 As such a wrapping body, for example, Patent Document 1 discloses a wrapping bag (packaging body) for disposable diapers and the like. This packaging bag (packaging body) is substantially parallel to the bottom surface of the packaging bag (packaging body) in the section from the upper surface of the object to be filled and accommodated below the seal line of the upper opening to the vicinity thereof. A break line (weak line) is attached.
特開2001-301859号公報Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2001-301859
 使用者は、吸収性物品を内包する包装体を、様々な態様で使用する。例えば、包装袋における弱め線よりも上側の部分である上面部を取り除いて、包装袋の上側に開口部を形成し、その開口部から吸収性物品を取り出す態様があり得る。すなわち、包装体を完全に開封する態様があり得る。また、例えば、包装袋における上面部の外周の一部を裂いて、上面部を部分的に包装袋の残りの部分に結合させたまま、包装袋の上側に開口部を形成し、その開口部から吸収性物品を取り出す態様があり得る。すなわち、包装体を部分的に開封する態様があり得る。この態様では、状況に応じて、上面部を把持して包装体を容易に持ち運ぶことができ、任意の場所で開口部から吸収性物品を取り出すことができる。このように、包装体は、様々な使用の態様に応じて、その上面部の開封の度合いを調節される。 The user uses a package containing an absorbent article in various modes. For example, there may be an embodiment in which the upper surface portion, which is a portion above the weakening line in the packaging bag, is removed to form an opening on the upper side of the packaging bag, and the absorbent article is taken out from the opening. That is, there may be a mode in which the package is completely opened. Further, for example, a part of the outer periphery of the upper surface portion of the packaging bag is torn to form an opening on the upper side of the packaging bag while the upper surface portion is partially connected to the remaining portion of the packaging bag. There may be an embodiment of taking out the absorbent article from. That is, there may be a mode in which the package is partially opened. In this aspect, depending on the situation, the upper surface portion can be gripped and the package can be easily carried, and the absorbent article can be taken out from the opening at any place. In this way, the degree of opening of the upper surface of the package is adjusted according to various modes of use.
 特許文献1の包装体では、包装袋の全周に亘って連続的に弱め線が設けられる場合がある。この場合、包装袋の上面部を取り除いて開口部を形成すること、よって包装体を完全に開封すること、及び、上面部を部分的に包装袋の残りの部分に結合させたまま開口部を形成すること、よって包装体を部分的に開封することは、いずれも容易である。すなわち、いずれの態様においても、包装体の開封は容易である。しかし、包装体を部分的に開封する態様において、包装体の持ち運びのときに、吸収性物品の重みで、上面部と包装袋の残りの部分との間で更なる弱め線の切り離しが生じるおそれがある。そうなると、上面部が包装袋の残りの部分から外れてしまい易くなり、包装体を持ち運び難くなる。すなわち、包装体が部分的に開封された状態を維持できず、完全に開封された状態になるおそれがあり、包装体の開封の制御が困難である。 In the package of Patent Document 1, a weakening line may be continuously provided over the entire circumference of the packaging bag. In this case, the upper surface of the packaging bag is removed to form an opening, thus completely opening the package, and the opening is opened with the upper surface partially bonded to the rest of the packaging bag. It is easy to form, and thus to partially open the package. That is, in any of the embodiments, the package is easy to open. However, in the embodiment of partially opening the package, the weight of the absorbent article may cause further weakening line separation between the top surface and the rest of the package bag when the package is carried. There is. In that case, the upper surface portion is likely to come off from the remaining portion of the packaging bag, and it becomes difficult to carry the package. That is, it is difficult to control the opening of the package because the package cannot be maintained in a partially opened state and may be in a completely opened state.
 一方、特許文献1の包装体では、包装袋の角部に夫々独立して同一高さに弱め線が設けられ、かつ、それら弱め線よりも少し低い位置に正面部、両側面部および背面部に夫々弱め線が更に設けられる場合がある。この場合、これら複数の弱め線は、包装袋の全周に亘って連続的に設けられてはいない。すなわち、角部において、隣り合う弱め線は互いに分離されている。したがって、包装体を部分的に開封する態様では、包装体の持ち運びのときに、吸収性物品の重みで、上面部と包装袋の残りの部分との間の複数の弱め線のうち、いくつかの弱め線の切り離しは起きるかもしれない。とはいえ、それらの弱め線の切り離しは角部で止まるので、隣の弱め線に及ぶことはない。すなわち、複数の弱め線のすべてに切り離しが生じることはなく、包装袋から上面部が外れることはない。それにより、上面部を把持して包装体を持ち運ぶことができる。すなわち、包装体の開封の制御は容易である。しかし、複数の弱め線は互いに分離されているため、複数の弱め線のすべてについて切り離しを行い、包装袋の上面部を取り除くことや、複数の弱め線のいくつかについて切り離しを行い、上面部を部分的に切り離すことは容易ではない。すなわち、いずれの態様においても、包装体の開封は容易ではない。 On the other hand, in the package of Patent Document 1, weakening lines are independently provided at the corners of the packaging bag at the same height, and the front portion, both side surface portions, and the back surface portion are slightly lower than the weakening lines. Further weakening lines may be provided for each. In this case, these plurality of weakening lines are not continuously provided over the entire circumference of the packaging bag. That is, at the corners, adjacent weakening lines are separated from each other. Therefore, in the embodiment of partially opening the package, some of the multiple weakening lines between the top surface and the rest of the packaging bag, due to the weight of the absorbent article, when the package is carried. Detachment of the weakening line may occur. However, the separation of those weakening lines stops at the corners, so it does not extend to the adjacent weakening lines. That is, the disconnection does not occur in all of the plurality of weakening lines, and the upper surface portion does not come off from the packaging bag. Thereby, the upper surface portion can be gripped and the package can be carried. That is, it is easy to control the opening of the package. However, since the multiple weakening lines are separated from each other, all of the multiple weakening lines are separated to remove the upper surface of the packaging bag, and some of the multiple weakening lines are separated to separate the upper surface. It is not easy to partially separate. That is, in any aspect, it is not easy to open the package.
 このように、特許文献1の包装体では、包装体の開封の容易性と、包装体の開封度合いの制御性との両立が困難である。 As described above, in the package of Patent Document 1, it is difficult to achieve both the ease of opening the package and the controllability of the degree of opening of the package.
 また、包装体では、包装袋に形成された開口部の大きさが大き過ぎると、吸収性物品が意図せずに開口部から外部へ脱落するおそれがある。そうかといって、その開口部の大きさが小さ過ぎると、吸収性物品を取り出すとき、開口部に引っ掛かけてしまい、取り出し難くなるおそれがある。 Further, in the case of a package, if the size of the opening formed in the packaging bag is too large, the absorbent article may unintentionally fall out of the opening. On the other hand, if the size of the opening is too small, when the absorbent article is taken out, it may be caught in the opening and it may be difficult to take out.
 したがって、本発明の目的は、包装体の開封の容易性と、包装体の開封度合いの制御性とを両立することが可能な包装体を提供することにある。 Therefore, an object of the present invention is to provide a package that can achieve both the ease of opening the package and the controllability of the degree of opening of the package.
 また、本発明の他の目的は、包装袋に弱め線で開口部が形成される包装体において、開口部からの吸収性物品の脱落を抑制することと、開口部からの吸収性物品の取り出しを容易にすることとを両立することが可能な包装体及びその製造方法を提供することにある。 Further, another object of the present invention is to prevent the absorbent article from falling out from the opening and to take out the absorbent article from the opening in the packaging body in which the opening is formed by the weakening line in the packaging bag. It is an object of the present invention to provide a package and a method for manufacturing the same, which can be compatible with facilitating the above.
 本発明の一態様の包装体は次の通りである。
 幅方向、奥行方向、及び上下方向を有し、複数の吸収性物品と、複数の側面部を有し、前記複数の吸収性物品を収納する包装袋と、を備える包装体であって、前記複数の側面部は、前面部、後面部、右面部、及び左面部を含み、前記包装袋は、前記前面部と前記右面部とが交わる部分、前記前面部と前記左面部とが交わる部分、前記後面部と前記右面部とが交わる部分、及び前記後面部と前記左面部とが交わる部分の各々に角部を有し、前記前面部及び前記後面部の各々において前記幅方向に沿って延びるように形成され、前記右面部及び前記左面部の各々において前記奥行方向に沿って延びるように形成された第1弱め線と、前記角部を跨ぐように形成された第2弱め線と、を備え、隣り合う前記第1弱め線同士は、前記角部で互いに離間しており、隣り合う前記第1弱め線と前記第2弱め線とは、互いに離間しており、隣り合う前記第2弱め線と前記第1弱め線との距離は、隣り合う前記第1弱め線同士の距離よりも短く、前記第2弱め線の端部の延長線は、当該第2弱め線の端部と隣り合う前記第1弱め線と交差する、包装体。
The package of one aspect of the present invention is as follows.
A package having a width direction, a depth direction, and a vertical direction, a plurality of absorbent articles, and a packaging bag having a plurality of side surfaces and storing the plurality of absorbent articles. The plurality of side surface portions include a front surface portion, a rear surface portion, a right surface portion, and a left surface portion, and the packaging bag includes a portion where the front surface portion and the right surface portion intersect, and a portion where the front surface portion and the left surface portion intersect. Each of the portion where the rear surface portion and the right surface portion intersects and the portion where the rear surface portion and the left surface portion intersect has a corner portion, and each of the front surface portion and the rear surface portion extends along the width direction. A first weakening line formed so as to extend along the depth direction in each of the right surface portion and the left surface portion, and a second weakening line formed so as to straddle the corner portion. The first weakening lines that are adjacent to each other are separated from each other at the corners, and the first weakening line and the second weakening line that are adjacent to each other are separated from each other, and the second weakening lines that are adjacent to each other are separated from each other. The distance between the line and the first weakening line is shorter than the distance between adjacent first weakening lines, and the extension of the end of the second weakening line is adjacent to the end of the second weakening line. A package that intersects the first weakening line.
 また、本発明の他の態様の包装体は次の通りである。
 幅方向、奥行方向、及び上下方向を有し、複数の吸収性物品と、複数の側面部を有し、前記複数の吸収性物品を収納する包装袋と、を備える包装体であって、前記複数の側面部は、前面部、後面部、右面部、及び左面部を含み、前記包装袋は、前記前面部と前記右面部とが交わる部分、前記前面部と前記左面部とが交わる部分、前記後面部と前記右面部とが交わる部分、及び前記後面部と前記左面部とが交わる部分の各々に角部を有し、前記前面部及び前記後面部の各々において前記幅方向に沿って延びるように形成され、前記右面部及び前記左面部の各々において前記奥行方向に沿って延びるように形成された第1弱め線と、前記角部を跨ぐように形成された第2弱め線と、を備え、前記第2弱め線は、隣り合う少なくとも一つの前記第1弱め線の切り離しが行われ、前記前面部、前記後面部、前記右面部、及び前記左面部の少なくとも一つの前記第1弱め線よりも前記上下方向の上側の部分が把持されて、前記包装体が持ち上げられたとき、前記複数の吸収性物品の重みで、前記第1弱め線の切り離しが、前記角部に伝搬したとしても、到達できない位置、に形成されている、包装体。
Further, the packaging body of another aspect of the present invention is as follows.
A packaging body comprising a plurality of absorbent articles having a width direction, a depth direction, and a vertical direction, and a packaging bag having a plurality of side surfaces and storing the plurality of absorbent articles. The plurality of side surface portions include a front surface portion, a rear surface portion, a right surface portion, and a left surface portion, and the packaging bag includes a portion where the front surface portion and the right surface portion intersect, and a portion where the front surface portion and the left surface portion intersect. Each of the portion where the rear surface portion and the right surface portion intersects and the portion where the rear surface portion and the left surface portion intersect has a corner portion, and each of the front surface portion and the rear surface portion extends along the width direction. A first weakening line formed so as to extend along the depth direction in each of the right surface portion and the left surface portion, and a second weakening line formed so as to straddle the corner portion. The second weakening line is provided with at least one adjacent first weakening line separated from the first weakening line, and at least one of the front surface portion, the rear surface portion, the right surface portion, and the left surface portion. Even if the separation of the first weakening line propagates to the corner portion due to the weight of the plurality of absorbent articles when the upper portion in the vertical direction is grasped and the package is lifted. The packaging is formed in an unreachable position.
 本発明の更に他の態様の包装体は次の通りである。
 幅方向、奥行方向、及び上下方向を有し、複数の吸収性物品と、複数の側面部を有し、前記複数の吸収性物品を収納する包装袋と、を備える包装体であって、前記複数の側面部は、前面部、後面部、右面部、及び左面部を含み、前記包装袋は、前記複数の側面部の少なくとも一つに開封部を含み、前記開封部は、前記上下方向に沿って延び、前記幅方向又は前記奥行方向に間隔を空けて並んだ二本の縦弱め線と、前記幅方向又は前記奥行方向に沿って延び、前記二本の縦弱め線における前記上下方向の上側の端部同士をつなぐ横弱め線と、を含み、前記複数の吸収性物品は、前記包装体内で縦置きに、前記幅方向又は前記奥行方向に整列されており、前記二本の縦弱め線における前記上下方向の下端の位置は、前記複数の吸収性物品における前記上下方向の下端の位置よりも高く、前記複数の吸収性物品における前記上下方向の中間の位置よりも低い、包装体。
The packaging of still another aspect of the present invention is as follows.
A packaging body comprising a plurality of absorbent articles having a width direction, a depth direction, and a vertical direction, and a packaging bag having a plurality of side surfaces and storing the plurality of absorbent articles. The plurality of side surfaces includes a front surface portion, a rear surface portion, a right surface portion, and a left surface portion, the packaging bag includes an opening portion in at least one of the plurality of side surface portions, and the opening portion includes the opening portion in the vertical direction. Two vertical weakening lines extending along the width direction or the depth direction and arranged at intervals, and the vertical weakening lines extending along the width direction or the depth direction and extending in the vertical direction in the two vertical weakening lines. The plurality of absorbent articles are arranged vertically in the package in the width direction or the depth direction, including a horizontal weakening line connecting the upper ends, and the two vertical weakening lines. A package in which the position of the lower end in the vertical direction on the line is higher than the position of the lower end in the vertical direction in the plurality of absorbent articles and lower than the position in the middle of the vertical direction in the plurality of absorbent articles.
 本発明の更に他の態様の包装体の製造方法は次の通りである。
 幅方向、奥行方向及び上下方向を有し、前面部、後面部、右面部、及び左面部を含む複数の側面部を備え、前記複数の側面部の少なくとも一つに開封部を含み、前記開封部は、前記上下方向に沿って延び、前記幅方向又は前記奥行方向に間隔を空けて並んだ二本の縦弱め線と、前記幅方向又は前記奥行方向に沿って延び、前記二本の縦弱め線における前記上下方向の上側の端部同士をつなぐ横弱め線と、を含む、複数の吸収性物品を収納可能な包装袋であって、搬送方向、横断方向、及び厚さ方向を有し、前記搬送方向に沿って延びる筒状の樹脂シート部材における、前記横断方向の両側を、それぞれ前記横断方向の内側に向かって谷折りで折り畳むことにより、前記厚さ方向の一方側及び他方側にそれぞれ位置する前記前面部及び前記後面部と、前記前面部と前記後面部との間に折り畳まれ、前記横断方向の右側及び左側にそれぞれ位置する前記右面部及び前記左面部と、を形成する側面形成工程と、前記前面部及び前記後面部のうちの一方側から他方側に向かって弱め線形成刃を押し付けることにより、前記前面部及び前記後面部に、前記搬送方向に延びる前記二本の縦弱め線及び前記横断方向に延びる前記横弱め線を形成すると同時に、前記右面部及び前記左面部に、前記二本の縦弱め線及び前記横弱め線を形成する弱め線形成工程と、を備え、前記二本の縦弱め線における前記搬送方向の下端の位置は、前記包装袋に前記複数の吸収性物品が収納されているとき、前記複数の吸収性物品における前記搬送方向に平行な前記上下方向の下端の位置よりも高く、前記複数の吸収性物品における前記上下方向の中間の位置よりも低くなるように、形成される、包装袋の製造方法。
The method for producing a package according to still another aspect of the present invention is as follows.
It has a width direction, a depth direction, and a vertical direction, has a plurality of side surface portions including a front surface portion, a rear surface portion, a right surface portion, and a left surface portion, and at least one of the plurality of side surface portions includes an opening portion, and the opening portion is included. The portion extends along the vertical direction and extends along the width direction or the depth direction and two vertical weakening lines arranged at intervals in the width direction or the depth direction. A packaging bag capable of storing a plurality of absorbent articles, including a lateral weakening line connecting the upper ends of the weakening line in the vertical direction, having a transport direction, a transverse direction, and a thickness direction. In the tubular resin sheet member extending along the transport direction, both sides in the transverse direction are folded in a valley fold toward the inside of the transverse direction, so that one side and the other side in the thickness direction can be obtained. A side surface that is folded between the front surface portion and the rear surface portion and forms the right surface portion and the left surface portion that are located on the right side and the left side in the transverse direction, respectively. By pressing the weakening line forming blade from one side of the front surface portion and the rear surface portion toward the other side in the forming step, the two vertical lengths extending in the transport direction are applied to the front surface portion and the rear surface portion. At the same time as forming the weakening line and the horizontal weakening line extending in the transverse direction, the right surface portion and the left surface portion are provided with a weakening line forming step of forming the two vertical weakening lines and the horizontal weakening line. The position of the lower end of the two vertical weakening lines in the transport direction is the vertical direction parallel to the transport direction of the plurality of absorbent articles when the plurality of absorbent articles are stored in the packaging bag. A method of manufacturing a packaging bag, which is formed so as to be higher than the position of the lower end of the container and lower than the position in the middle of the vertical direction in the plurality of absorbent articles.
 本発明によれば、包装体の開封の容易性と、包装体の開封度合いの制御性とを両立することが可能な包装体を提供することができる。 According to the present invention, it is possible to provide a package that can achieve both the ease of opening the package and the controllability of the degree of opening of the package.
 本発明によれば、更に、包装袋に弱め線で開口部が形成される包装体において、開口部からの吸収性物品の脱落を抑制することと、開口部からの吸収性物品の取り出しを容易にすることとを両立することが可能な包装体及びその製造方法を提供することができる。 According to the present invention, further, in a package in which an opening is formed by a weakening line in the packaging bag, it is possible to suppress the falling of the absorbent article from the opening and to easily take out the absorbent article from the opening. It is possible to provide a package and a method for producing the same, which can be compatible with the above.
実施形態に係る包装体の構成例を模式的に示す斜視図である。It is a perspective view which shows typically the structural example of the package | body which concerns on embodiment. 実施形態に係る包装体の構成例を模式的に示す正面図である。It is a front view which shows typically the structural example of the package | body which concerns on embodiment. 実施形態に係る包装体の構成例を模式的に示す右側面図である。It is a right side view which shows typically the structural example of the package | body which concerns on embodiment. 実施形態に係る包装体の包装袋を模式的に示す展開図である。It is a development view which shows typically the packaging bag of the package | body which concerns on embodiment. 実施形態に係る包装体の第1弱め線及び第2弱め線の構成例を示す模式図である。It is a schematic diagram which shows the structural example of the 1st weakening line and the 2nd weakening line of the package which concerns on embodiment. 実施形態に係る包装体を完全に又は部分的に開封する態様を示す模式図である。It is a schematic diagram which shows the mode of opening the package | package which concerns on embodiment completely or partially. 実施形態に係る包装体の作用効果を示す模式図である。It is a schematic diagram which shows the action effect of the package | body which concerns on embodiment. 実施形態に係る包装体の作用効果を示す模式図である。It is a schematic diagram which shows the action effect of the package | body which concerns on embodiment. 実施形態に係る第1弱め線及び第2弱め線の構成例を示す模式図である。It is a schematic diagram which shows the structural example of the 1st weakening line and the 2nd weakening line which concerns on embodiment. 実施形態に係る第1弱め線及び第2弱め線の構成例を示す模式図である。It is a schematic diagram which shows the structural example of the 1st weakening line and the 2nd weakening line which concerns on embodiment. 実施形態に係る包装体の製造方法の一例を示す模式図である。It is a schematic diagram which shows an example of the manufacturing method of the package | body which concerns on embodiment. 実施形態に係る包装体を前面部及び左面部で開封した状態を示す模式図である。It is a schematic diagram which shows the state which the package | package which concerns on embodiment is opened in the front part part and the left side part. 実施形態に係る縦弱め線及び横弱め線の構成例を示す模式図である。It is a schematic diagram which shows the structural example of the vertical weakening line and the horizontal weakening line which concerns on embodiment. 実施形態に係る縦弱め線及び横弱め線の構成例を示す模式図である。It is a schematic diagram which shows the structural example of the vertical weakening line and the horizontal weakening line which concerns on embodiment. 実施形態に係る包装体の他の構成例を模式的に示す正面図及び右側面図である。It is a front view and the right-side view which schematically show the other structural example of the package | body which concerns on embodiment.
 本実施形態は、以下の態様に関する。
 [態様1]
 幅方向、奥行方向、及び上下方向を有し、複数の吸収性物品と、複数の側面部を有し、前記複数の吸収性物品を収納する包装袋と、を備える包装体であって、前記複数の側面部は、前面部、後面部、右面部、及び左面部を含み、前記包装袋は、前記前面部と前記右面部とが交わる部分、前記前面部と前記左面部とが交わる部分、前記後面部と前記右面部とが交わる部分、及び前記後面部と前記左面部とが交わる部分の各々に角部を有し、前記前面部及び前記後面部の各々において前記幅方向に沿って延びるように形成され、前記右面部及び前記左面部の各々において前記奥行方向に沿って延びるように形成された第1弱め線と、前記角部を跨ぐように形成された第2弱め線と、を備え、隣り合う前記第1弱め線同士は、前記角部で互いに離間しており、隣り合う前記第1弱め線と前記第2弱め線とは、互いに離間しており、隣り合う前記第2弱め線と前記第1弱め線との距離は、隣り合う前記第1弱め線同士の距離よりも短く、前記第2弱め線の端部の延長線は、当該第2弱め線の端部と隣り合う前記第1弱め線と交差する、包装体。
The present embodiment relates to the following aspects.
[Aspect 1]
A package having a width direction, a depth direction, and a vertical direction, a plurality of absorbent articles, and a packaging bag having a plurality of side surfaces and storing the plurality of absorbent articles. The plurality of side surface portions include a front surface portion, a rear surface portion, a right surface portion, and a left surface portion, and the packaging bag includes a portion where the front surface portion and the right surface portion intersect, and a portion where the front surface portion and the left surface portion intersect. Each of the portion where the rear surface portion and the right surface portion intersects and the portion where the rear surface portion and the left surface portion intersect has a corner portion, and each of the front surface portion and the rear surface portion extends along the width direction. A first weakening line formed so as to extend along the depth direction in each of the right surface portion and the left surface portion, and a second weakening line formed so as to straddle the corner portion. The first weakening lines that are adjacent to each other are separated from each other at the corners, and the first weakening line and the second weakening line that are adjacent to each other are separated from each other, and the second weakening lines that are adjacent to each other are separated from each other. The distance between the line and the first weakening line is shorter than the distance between adjacent first weakening lines, and the extension of the end of the second weakening line is adjacent to the end of the second weakening line. A package that intersects the first weakening line.
 本包装体では、角部において、第1弱め線の近傍に第2弱め線が形成され、第2弱め線の端部の延長線が第2弱め線と隣り合う第1弱め線と交差している。
 そのため、包装体を完全に開封する態様及び包装体を部分的に開封する態様にて、使用者は、第2弱め線の切り離しを行ったのち、そのままその切り離しの力を第1弱め線に容易に移行させることができるので、その第1弱め線の切り離しを容易に行うことができる。よって、必要な数の第1弱め線及び第2弱め線の切り離しを行うことで、包装袋から、包装袋の上面部を容易に取り除くこと、及び、部分的に容易に切り離すことができる。
 更に、本包装体では、包装袋の全周(前面部、後面部、右面部及び左面部)に亘って設けられた複数の第1弱め線は、連続的には設けられていない。すなわち、角部において、隣り合う第1弱め線同士は互いに離間している。更に、包装袋の全角部に設けられた複数の第2弱め線は、複数の第1弱め線のうちの隣り合う第1弱め線とは所定の距離で互いに離間している。この場合、前面部、後面部、右面部、及び左面部の第1弱め線及び第2弱め線よりも上下方向の上側の部分が上面部である。
 ここで、包装体を部分的に開封する態様では、包装袋の上面部を把持して持ち運ぶときに、吸収性物品の重みで、切り離しの力が、開封のために切り離された第1弱め線から、切り離されていない第1弱め線に伝わることで、切り離しが起きる又は進むかもしれない。しかし、本包装体では、それらの第1弱め線の切り離しは、角部で止まり、隣の第2弱め線に移行することはなく、更に隣の第1弱め線に移行することがないので、包装袋から上面部が外れることはない。それにより、使用者は、上面部を把持して包装体を別の場所へ持ち運ぶことができる(持ち運びの耐久性が高くなる)。
 このように、この包装体は、様々な使用の態様に応じて、包装袋の上面部の切り離しの度合いを調節すること、すなわち、包装体の開封度合いの制御性と、包装袋の上面部を完全に又は部分的に容易に切り離すこと、すなわち、包装体の開封の容易性と、を両立させることができる。
In this package, a second weakening line is formed in the vicinity of the first weakening line at the corner portion, and an extension line at the end of the second weakening line intersects the first weakening line adjacent to the second weakening line. There is.
Therefore, in the mode of completely opening the package and the mode of partially opening the package, the user can easily apply the force of the disconnection to the first weakening line after disconnecting the second weakening line. Since it can be transferred to, the first weakening line can be easily separated. Therefore, by separating the required number of the first weakening wire and the second weakening wire, the upper surface portion of the packaging bag can be easily removed from the packaging bag, and the upper surface portion can be easily partially separated.
Further, in the present package, a plurality of first weakening lines provided over the entire circumference (front portion, rear surface portion, right surface portion and left surface portion) of the packaging bag are not continuously provided. That is, at the corners, the adjacent first weakening lines are separated from each other. Further, the plurality of second weakening lines provided at the full-width portion of the packaging bag are separated from each other by a predetermined distance from the adjacent first weakening line among the plurality of first weakening lines. In this case, the upper surface portion in the vertical direction from the first weakening line and the second weakening line of the front surface portion, the rear surface portion, the right surface portion, and the left surface portion is the upper surface portion.
Here, in the embodiment of partially opening the package, when the upper surface of the packaging bag is gripped and carried, the weight of the absorbent article causes the separating force to be the first weakening line separated for opening. From, the separation may occur or proceed by propagating to the first weakening line that is not separated. However, in this package, the separation of the first weakening line stops at the corner and does not shift to the adjacent second weakening line, and does not further shift to the adjacent first weakening line. The upper surface does not come off from the packaging bag. As a result, the user can grasp the upper surface portion and carry the package to another place (the carrying durability becomes high).
As described above, the packaging body adjusts the degree of separation of the upper surface portion of the packaging bag according to various usage modes, that is, the controllability of the opening degree of the packaging body and the upper surface portion of the packaging bag. It is possible to achieve both complete or partial easy separation, that is, ease of opening the package.
 [態様2]
 前記第2弱め線の少なくとも端部は、隣り合う前記第1弱め線と、前記上下方向において重なる、態様1に記載の包装体。
 本包装体では、第2弱め線の少なくとも端部が隣り合う第1弱め線と上下方向において重なっている。そのため、使用者が、包装体を開封しようとして、第2弱め線の切り離しを行ったとき、その切り離しの力を第1弱め線に確実に移行でき、その第1の弱め線の切り離しをより容易に行うことができる。よって、包装体を容易に開封できる。
[Aspect 2]
The package according to aspect 1, wherein at least an end portion of the second weakening line overlaps with the adjacent first weakening line in the vertical direction.
In this package, at least the end of the second weakening line overlaps with the adjacent first weakening line in the vertical direction. Therefore, when the user tries to open the package and disconnects the second weakening line, the force of the disconnection can be reliably transferred to the first weakening line, and the first weakening line can be separated more easily. Can be done. Therefore, the package can be easily opened.
 [態様3]
 前記第1弱め線は、前記上下方向における前記複数の吸収性物品の上側の端縁と同じ位置又は前記端縁よりも上側の位置に形成さており、前記第2弱め線は、前記第1弱め線よりも前記上下方向の上側の位置に形成されている、態様1又は2に記載の包装体。
 本包装体では、第1弱め線は、上下方向において、包装袋に収納された吸収性物品の上側の端縁と同じ位置又は端縁よりも上側の位置に形成されており、第2弱め線は、第1弱め線よりも上下方向の上側に位置している。そのため、第2弱め線の位置が、包装体内の吸収性物品の位置と重なることがない。したがって、包装体が、吸収性物品で膨れた状態であっても、使用者は、その膨れた部分に影響されることなく、例えば、第2弱め線の近傍を容易に摘まんで、第2弱め線の切り離しを容易に行うことができる。すなわち、包装体を容易に開封できる。
[Aspect 3]
The first weakening line is formed at the same position as the upper edge of the plurality of absorbent articles in the vertical direction or at a position above the edge, and the second weakening line is the first weakening line. The package according to aspect 1 or 2, which is formed at a position above the line in the vertical direction.
In this package, the first weakening line is formed in the vertical direction at the same position as the upper edge of the absorbent article stored in the packaging bag or at a position above the edge, and the second weakening line is formed. Is located above the first weakening line in the vertical direction. Therefore, the position of the second weakening line does not overlap with the position of the absorbent article in the package. Therefore, even if the package is inflated with an absorbent article, the user can easily pick the vicinity of the second weakening line, for example, without being affected by the inflated portion, and perform the second weakening. The lines can be easily separated. That is, the package can be easily opened.
 [態様4]
 前記第2弱め線の少なくとも端部の延長線は、隣り合う前記第1弱め線に対して鋭角に交差する、態様1乃至3のいずれか一項に記載の包装体。
 本包装体では、第2弱め線の少なくとも端部の延長線は、隣り合う第1弱め線に対して鋭角に交差する。そのため、使用者が、包装体を開封しようとして、第2弱め線の切り離しを行ったとき、その切り離しの力を、第2弱め線の第1弱め線に対する鋭角な傾きに沿って、第2弱め線から第1弱め線へ滑らかに移行させることができる。それにより、両弱め線の切り離しをより容易に行うことができ、包装体を容易に開封できる。
[Aspect 4]
The package according to any one of aspects 1 to 3, wherein the extension line at least at the end of the second weakening line intersects the adjacent first weakening line at an acute angle.
In this package, the extension of at least the end of the second weakening line intersects the adjacent first weakening line at an acute angle. Therefore, when the user tries to open the package and disconnects the second weakening line, the force of the disconnection is applied to the second weakening line along the acute angle of the second weakening line with respect to the first weakening line. The line can be smoothly transitioned from the line to the first weakening line. Thereby, both weakening lines can be separated more easily, and the package can be easily opened.
 [態様5]
 前記第2弱め線は、前記第2弱め線における前記包装体の表面に沿った方向の中央部を頂点とする、前記上下方向の上側又は下側に凸の形状を有する、態様1乃至4のいずれか一項に記載の包装体。
 本包装体では、第2弱め線が、包装体の表面に沿った方向の中央部を頂点とする、上下方向の上側又は下側に凸の形状、よって、両側、すなわち、隣り合う第1弱め線側の部分が第1弱め線に漸近する形状を有している。そのため、使用者が、包装体を開封しようとして、第2弱め線の切り離しを行ったとき、その切り離しの力を、第2弱め線の第1弱め線側の部分に沿って、第2弱め線から第1弱め線へより滑らかに移行させることができる。それにより、両弱め線における切り離しをより容易に行うことができ、包装体をより容易に開封できる。
[Aspect 5]
The second weakening line has a convex shape on the upper side or the lower side in the vertical direction, with the central portion of the second weakening line in the direction along the surface of the package as an apex. The package according to any one of the items.
In this package, the second weakening line has a convex shape in the vertical direction, with the central portion in the direction along the surface of the package as the apex, and thus both sides, that is, adjacent first weakening lines. The portion on the line side has a shape that asymptotes to the first weakening line. Therefore, when the user tries to open the package and disconnects the second weakening line, the force of the disconnection is applied to the second weakening line along the portion of the second weakening line on the first weakening line side. It is possible to make a smoother transition from the first weakening line to the first weakening line. Thereby, the separation at both weakening lines can be performed more easily, and the package can be opened more easily.
 [態様6]
 前記前面部、前記後面部、前記右面部、及び前記左面部の各々における前記上下方向の上側の部分に設けられた取手部を更に備える、態様1乃至5のいずれか一項に記載の包装体。
 本包装体は、前面部、後面部、右面部、及び左面部における上下方向の上側の部分、例えば、上面部、又は、上面部の上部、に設けられた取手部を備えている。それにより、包装袋の上面部における外周の一部を第1弱め線で切り離し、部分的に結合されている上面部を取っ手で把持して包装体を別の場所へ容易に持ち運ぶことができる。ここで、このような包装体を持ち運ぶとき、吸収性物品の重みで、上面部における外周の残りの部分が切り離されて、上面部が包装袋の残りの部分から分離してしまうそれがある。しかし、この包装体は、上記したような構成を有しているので、部分的に結合されている上面部が分離する事態を生じさせることはない。
[Aspect 6]
The package according to any one of aspects 1 to 5, further comprising a handle portion provided on the upper portion in the vertical direction in each of the front surface portion, the rear surface portion, the right surface portion, and the left surface portion. ..
The present package includes a handle portion provided on a front surface portion, a rear surface portion, a right surface portion, and an upper portion in the vertical direction on the left surface portion, for example, an upper surface portion or an upper portion of the upper surface portion. Thereby, a part of the outer periphery of the upper surface portion of the packaging bag can be separated by the first weakening line, and the partially bonded upper surface portion can be grasped by the handle to easily carry the package to another place. Here, when carrying such a package, the weight of the absorbent article may separate the remaining portion of the outer circumference of the upper surface from the rest of the packaging bag. However, since this package has the above-mentioned structure, it does not cause a situation in which the partially bonded upper surface portions are separated.
 [態様7]
 前記右面部及び前記左面部は、それぞれ前記前面部及び前記後面部との間における、前記幅方向の右側及び左側に谷折りに折り畳まれた部分であり、前記右面部と前記前面部との前記角部の前記第2弱め線は、前記右面部と前記前面部との境界線に対して線対称な形状を有し、前記右面部と前記後面部との前記角部の前記第2弱め線は、前記右面部と前記後面部との境界線に対して線対称な形状を有し、前記左面部と前記前面部との前記角部の前記第2弱め線は、前記左面部と前記前面部との境界線に対して線対称な形状を有し、前記左面部と前記後面部との前記角部の前記第2弱め線は、前記左面部と前記後面部との境界線に対して線対称な形状を有する、態様1乃至6のいずれか一項に記載の包装体。
 本包装体は、右面部及び左面部がそれぞれ前面部及び後面部との間に谷折りに折り畳まれた部分であるから、ガゼットタイプの包装体である。そして、第2弱め線は、右面部及び左面部の各々と前面部及び後面部の各々との境界線に対して線対称な形状を有している。それにより、右面部及び左面部の各々と前面部及び後面部の各々との角部から、第2弱め線の切り離しを行うことで、右面部及び左面部の各々の第2弱め線と前面部及び後面部の各々の第2弱め線とを同時に一緒に破断することができる。それにより、両第2弱め線の切り離しをより容易に行うことができ、全体として包装体をより容易に開封できる。
[Aspect 7]
The right surface portion and the left surface portion are portions folded in a valley fold on the right side and the left side in the width direction between the front surface portion and the rear surface portion, respectively, and the right surface portion and the front surface portion are the same. The second weakening line at the corner portion has a shape symmetrical with respect to the boundary line between the right surface portion and the front surface portion, and the second weakening line at the corner portion between the right surface portion and the rear surface portion. Has a shape that is line-symmetrical with respect to the boundary line between the right surface portion and the rear surface portion, and the second weakening line at the corner portion between the left surface portion and the front surface portion is the left surface portion and the front surface portion. The second weakening line of the corner portion between the left surface portion and the rear surface portion has a shape symmetrical with respect to the boundary line with the portion, and the second weakening line is with respect to the boundary line between the left surface portion and the rear surface portion. The package according to any one of aspects 1 to 6, which has a line-symmetrical shape.
This package is a gusset type package because the right surface portion and the left surface portion are folded in a valley fold between the front surface portion and the rear surface portion, respectively. The second weakening line has a shape that is line-symmetrical with respect to the boundary line between each of the right surface portion and the left surface portion and each of the front surface portion and the rear surface portion. As a result, the second weakening line is separated from the corners of the right and left surfaces and the front and rear surfaces, respectively, so that the second weakening line and the front surface of the right and left surfaces are separated from each other. And each second weakening line of the rear surface portion can be broken together at the same time. Thereby, both second weakening lines can be separated more easily, and the package can be opened more easily as a whole.
 [態様8]
 前記第1弱め線は、前記上下方向における前記包装体に収納された前記複数の吸収性物品の上側の端縁と同じ位置又は前記端縁よりも上側の位置に形成されており、前記第2弱め線は、前記第1弱め線よりも前記上下方向の上側に位置している、態様7に記載の包装体。
 本包装体では、第1弱め線が複数の吸収性物品の上側の端縁と同じ位置又は端縁よりも上側の位置に形成され、第2弱め線が第1弱め線の上側に位置している。そのため、包装体における第2弱め線の位置が、収納された吸収性物品の位置と重なることがない。したがって、包装体が、収納された吸収性物品で膨れた状態であっても、使用者は、その膨れた部分に影響されることなく、例えば、第2弱め線の近傍を容易に摘まんで、第2弱め線の切り離しを容易に行うことができる。すなわち、包装体を容易に開封できる。
[Aspect 8]
The first weakening line is formed at the same position as the upper edge of the plurality of absorbent articles housed in the package in the vertical direction or at a position above the edge, and the second weakening line is formed. The package according to aspect 7, wherein the weakening line is located above the first weakening line in the vertical direction.
In this package, the first weakening line is formed at the same position as the upper edge of the plurality of absorbent articles or at a position above the edge, and the second weakening line is located above the first weakening line. There is. Therefore, the position of the second weakening line in the package does not overlap with the position of the stored absorbent article. Therefore, even if the package is inflated with the stored absorbent article, the user can easily pick the vicinity of the second weakening line, for example, without being affected by the inflated portion. The second weakening line can be easily separated. That is, the package can be easily opened.
 [態様9]
 隣り合う前記第1弱め線と前記第2弱め線との距離は、前記第1弱め線を構成する弱め部分同士の距離よりも長い、態様1乃至8のいずれか一項に記載の包装体。
 本包装体では、第1弱め線と第2弱め線との距離が第1弱め線を構成する弱め部分同士の距離よりも長い。そのため、包装体を部分的に開封する態様において、上面部を把持して包装体を持ち運ぶとき、吸収性物品の重みがあっても、第1弱め線の切り離しは、第2弱め線に伝搬せず、角部で止まることになる。それにより、上面部を把持して包装体を別の場所へ安定的に持ち運ぶことができる(持ち運びの耐久性が高くなる)。
[Aspect 9]
The package according to any one of aspects 1 to 8, wherein the distance between the adjacent first weakening line and the second weakening line is longer than the distance between the weakening portions constituting the first weakening line.
In this package, the distance between the first weakening line and the second weakening line is longer than the distance between the weakening portions constituting the first weakening line. Therefore, in the embodiment of partially opening the package, when the upper surface portion is gripped and the package is carried, the disconnection of the first weakening line propagates to the second weakening line even if the weight of the absorbent article is heavy. Instead, it will stop at the corner. As a result, the upper surface portion can be gripped and the package can be stably carried to another place (the carrying durability is increased).
 [態様10]
 前記第2弱め線は、前記包装体の表面に沿った方向の中央を頂点とするアーチ型の形状を有する、態様1乃至9のいずれか一項に記載の包装体。
 本包装体では、第2弱め線が、包装体の表面に沿った方向の中央を頂点とするアーチ型、よって、略円弧の形状を有している。そのため、包装体を部分的に開封する態様において、上面部を把持して包装体を持ち運ぼうとしたとき、吸収性物品の重みで、第1弱め線の切り離しが隣り合う第2弱め線へ伝搬したとしても、第2弱め線がアーチ型であるため、切り離しの力が分散され、第2弱め線の切り離しが進行し難くなる。それにより、上面部を把持して包装体を別の場所へ安定的に持ち運ぶことができる(持ち運びの耐久性が高くなる)。
[Aspect 10]
The package according to any one of aspects 1 to 9, wherein the second weakening line has an arch-shaped shape having an apex at the center in the direction along the surface of the package.
In the present package, the second weakening line has an arch shape having the center in the direction along the surface of the package as an apex, and thus has a substantially arc shape. Therefore, in the embodiment of partially opening the package, when the upper surface portion is grasped and the package is to be carried, the weight of the absorbent article causes the separation of the first weakening line to propagate to the adjacent second weakening line. Even so, since the second weakening line is arched, the separating force is dispersed, and it becomes difficult for the second weakening line to be separated. As a result, the upper surface portion can be gripped and the package can be stably carried to another place (the carrying durability is increased).
 [態様11]
 幅方向、奥行方向、及び上下方向を有し、複数の吸収性物品と、複数の側面部を有し、前記複数の吸収性物品を収納する包装袋と、を備える包装体であって、前記複数の側面部は、前面部、後面部、右面部、及び左面部を含み、前記包装袋は、前記前面部と前記右面部とが交わる部分、前記前面部と前記左面部とが交わる部分、前記後面部と前記右面部とが交わる部分、及び前記後面部と前記左面部とが交わる部分の各々に角部を有し、前記前面部及び前記後面部の各々において前記幅方向に沿って延びるように形成され、前記右面部及び前記左面部の各々において前記奥行方向に沿って延びるように形成された第1弱め線と、前記角部を跨ぐように形成された第2弱め線と、を備え、前記第2弱め線は、隣り合う少なくとも一つの前記第1弱め線の切り離しが行われ、前記前面部、前記後面部、前記右面部、及び前記左面部の少なくとも一つの前記第1弱め線よりも前記上下方向の上側の部分が把持されて、前記包装体が持ち上げられたとき、前記複数の吸収性物品の重みで、前記第1弱め線の切り離しが、前記角部に伝搬したとしても、到達できない位置、に形成されている、包装体。
[Aspect 11]
A packaging body comprising a plurality of absorbent articles having a width direction, a depth direction, and a vertical direction, and a packaging bag having a plurality of side surfaces and storing the plurality of absorbent articles. The plurality of side surface portions include a front surface portion, a rear surface portion, a right surface portion, and a left surface portion, and the packaging bag includes a portion where the front surface portion and the right surface portion intersect, and a portion where the front surface portion and the left surface portion intersect. Each of the portion where the rear surface portion and the right surface portion intersects and the portion where the rear surface portion and the left surface portion intersect has a corner portion, and each of the front surface portion and the rear surface portion extends along the width direction. A first weakening line formed so as to extend along the depth direction in each of the right surface portion and the left surface portion, and a second weakening line formed so as to straddle the corner portion. The second weakening line is provided with at least one adjacent first weakening line separated from the first weakening line, and at least one of the front surface portion, the rear surface portion, the right surface portion, and the left surface portion. Even if the separation of the first weakening line propagates to the corner portion due to the weight of the plurality of absorbent articles when the upper portion in the vertical direction is grasped and the package is lifted. The packaging is formed in an unreachable position.
 本包装体は、前面部、後面部、右面部、及び左面部の各々に、幅方向又は奥行方向に沿って延びるように形成された第1弱め線を有し、角部を跨ぐように形成された第2弱め線を有している。したがって、第1弱め線及び第2弱め線を用いて、包装体を容易に開封することができる。この場合、前面部、後面部、右面部、及び左面部の第1弱め線及び第2弱め線よりも上下方向の上側の部分が上面部である。
 更に、包装体を部分的に開封する態様では、少なくとも一つの第1弱め線の切り離しが行われた後で、上面部が把持されて、包装体が持ち上げられたとき、吸収性物品の重みで、その第1弱め線の切り離しが角部へ向かって伝搬することが起こり得る。そこで、この包装体では、角部の第2弱め線は、第1弱め線の切り離しが、その角部に伝搬したとしても、到達できない位置に形成されている。それにより、第2弱め線の切り離しが起こることを抑制でき、第2弱め線よりも先の第1弱め線に切り離しが生じることを抑制できる。それにより、上面部を把持して包装体を別の場所へ安定的に持ち運ぶことができる。
 このように、この包装体は、包装体の開封の容易性と、包装体の開封度合いの制御性と、を両立させることができる。
The present package has a first weakening line formed so as to extend along the width direction or the depth direction on each of the front portion, the rear surface portion, the right surface portion, and the left surface portion, and is formed so as to straddle the corner portions. It has a second weakening line. Therefore, the package can be easily opened by using the first weakening wire and the second weakening wire. In this case, the upper surface portion in the vertical direction from the first weakening line and the second weakening line of the front surface portion, the rear surface portion, the right surface portion, and the left surface portion is the upper surface portion.
Further, in the embodiment of partially opening the package, after the separation of at least one first weakening line is performed, when the upper surface portion is grasped and the package is lifted, the weight of the absorbent article is applied. , It is possible that the disconnection of the first weakening line propagates toward the corner. Therefore, in this package, the second weakening line at the corner is formed at a position where the separation of the first weakening line cannot be reached even if it propagates to the corner. As a result, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of disconnection of the second weakening line, and it is possible to suppress the occurrence of separation of the first weakening line ahead of the second weakening line. As a result, the upper surface portion can be gripped and the package can be stably carried to another place.
As described above, this package can achieve both the ease of opening the package and the controllability of the degree of opening of the package.
 [態様12]
 幅方向、奥行方向、及び上下方向を有し、複数の吸収性物品と、複数の側面部を有し、前記複数の吸収性物品を収納する包装袋と、を備える包装体であって、前記複数の側面部は、前面部、後面部、右面部、及び左面部を含み、前記包装袋は、前記複数の側面部の少なくとも一つに開封部を含み、前記開封部は、前記上下方向に沿って延び、前記幅方向又は前記奥行方向に間隔を空けて並んだ二本の縦弱め線と、前記幅方向又は前記奥行方向に沿って延び、前記二本の縦弱め線における前記上下方向の上側の端部同士をつなぐ横弱め線と、を含み、前記複数の吸収性物品は、前記包装体内で縦置きに、前記幅方向又は前記奥行方向に整列されており、前記二本の縦弱め線における前記上下方向の下端の位置は、前記複数の吸収性物品における前記上下方向の下端の位置よりも高く、前記複数の吸収性物品における前記上下方向の中間の位置よりも低い、包装体。
[Aspect 12]
A packaging body comprising a plurality of absorbent articles having a width direction, a depth direction, and a vertical direction, and a packaging bag having a plurality of side surfaces and storing the plurality of absorbent articles. The plurality of side surfaces includes a front surface portion, a rear surface portion, a right surface portion, and a left surface portion, the packaging bag includes an opening portion in at least one of the plurality of side surface portions, and the opening portion includes the opening portion in the vertical direction. Two vertical weakening lines extending along the width direction or the depth direction and arranged at intervals, and the vertical weakening lines extending along the width direction or the depth direction and extending in the vertical direction in the two vertical weakening lines. The plurality of absorbent articles are arranged vertically in the package in the width direction or the depth direction, including a horizontal weakening line connecting the upper ends, and the two vertical weakening lines. A package in which the position of the lower end in the vertical direction on the line is higher than the position of the lower end in the vertical direction in the plurality of absorbent articles and lower than the position in the middle of the vertical direction in the plurality of absorbent articles.
 本包装体では、使用者は、包装袋の開封部において、横弱め線及び二本の縦弱め線の切り離しを行って、包装袋に開口部を形成し、その開口部から包装袋に収納された吸収性物品を取り出すことができる。そのとき、二本の縦弱め線における上下方向の下端の位置は、複数の吸収性物品における上下方向の下端の位置よりも高い。そのため、開封部を開封したとき、吸収性物品の下側の部分が、開口部の下端よりも下側に位置することになり、包装袋に保護されることになる。したがって、吸収性物品が意図せずに開口部から外部へ脱落することを抑制できる。更に、吸収性物品を取り出すとき、他の吸収性物品が意図せずに開口部から外部へ脱落することを抑制できる。また、二本の縦弱め線における上下方向の下端の位置は、複数の吸収性物品における上下方向の中間の位置よりも低い。そのため、開封部を開封したとき、吸収性物品の上側の半分以上の部分が、開口部の下端よりも上側に位置することになり、開口部から露出することになる。したがって、吸収性物品を取り出すとき、開口部に引っ掛かることを抑制できる。このように、この包装体において、開口部からの吸収性物品の脱落を抑制することと、開口部からの吸収性物品の取り出しを容易にすることとを両立できる。 In this package, the user separates the horizontal weakening line and the two vertical weakening lines at the opening portion of the packaging bag to form an opening in the packaging bag, and the user is stored in the packaging bag through the opening. The absorbent article can be taken out. At that time, the position of the lower end in the vertical direction on the two vertical weakening lines is higher than the position of the lower end in the vertical direction in the plurality of absorbent articles. Therefore, when the opened portion is opened, the lower portion of the absorbent article is located below the lower end of the opening portion, and is protected by the packaging bag. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the absorbent article from unintentionally falling out of the opening. Further, when the absorbent article is taken out, it is possible to prevent other absorbent articles from unintentionally falling out of the opening. Further, the position of the lower end in the vertical direction on the two vertical weakening lines is lower than the position in the middle in the vertical direction in the plurality of absorbent articles. Therefore, when the opened portion is opened, the upper half or more of the absorbent article is located above the lower end of the opening and is exposed from the opening. Therefore, when the absorbent article is taken out, it can be prevented from being caught in the opening. As described above, in this package, it is possible to suppress the falling of the absorbent article from the opening and to facilitate the removal of the absorbent article from the opening.
 [態様13]
 前記開封部は、前記前面部及び前記後面部の少なくとも一方、及び、前記右面部及び前記左面部の少なくとも一方の各々に、配置されている、態様12に記載の包装体。
 本包装体では、開封部は、前面部又は後面部、及び、右側面部又は左側面部に配置されている。すなわち、包装体では、奥行方向に向いた開封部、及び、幅方向に向いた開封部が形成されている。そのため、使用者は、両開封部を開口することで、幅方向及び奥行方向の二方向に向いた開口部のそれぞれから吸収性物品を取り出すことができる。したがって、任意の場所に包装体を置いても、吸収性物品をいずれかの開封部の開口部から容易に取り出すことができる。
[Aspect 13]
The package according to aspect 12, wherein the opening portion is arranged in at least one of the front surface portion and the rear surface portion, and at least one of the right surface portion and the left surface portion.
In this package, the opening portion is arranged on the front surface portion or the rear surface portion, and the right side surface portion or the left side surface portion. That is, in the package, an opening portion facing the depth direction and an opening portion facing the width direction are formed. Therefore, the user can take out the absorbent article from each of the openings facing in the width direction and the depth direction by opening both the opening portions. Therefore, even if the package is placed in any place, the absorbent article can be easily taken out from the opening of any opening portion.
 [態様14]
 前記開封部は、前記包装袋に収納された状態の前記複数の吸収性物品における前記上下方向の上面部分の一部を覆うように形成され、当該開封部の前記横弱め線は、当該開封部における前記上面部分の一部を覆う部分に形成されている、態様12又は13に記載の包装体。
 本包装体では、開封部が、包装袋に収納された状態の複数の吸収性物品の上面部分の一部を覆うように形成され、その横弱め線が、その開封部における上面部分の一部を覆う部分に形成されている。そのため、開封部を横弱め線から開封したとき、包装袋に収納された状態の複数の吸収性物品における上面部分から側面部分までの領域が露出するように開口部を形成することができる。それにより、吸収性物品を取り出すとき、吸収性物品一つ一つを開口部で視認し易くすることできると共に、吸収性物品の上面部分を開口部の上側部側の端に引っ掛かり難くすることができる。したがって、吸収性物品を開口部からより容易に取り出すことができる。
[Aspect 14]
The opening portion is formed so as to cover a part of the upper surface portion in the vertical direction of the plurality of absorbent articles stored in the packaging bag, and the lateral weakening line of the opening portion is the opening portion. The package according to aspect 12 or 13, which is formed in a portion covering a part of the upper surface portion in the above.
In the present package, the opening portion is formed so as to cover a part of the upper surface portion of the plurality of absorbent articles stored in the packaging bag, and the lateral weakening line is a part of the upper surface portion in the opening portion. It is formed in the part that covers. Therefore, when the opened portion is opened from the lateral weakening line, the opening can be formed so that the region from the upper surface portion to the side surface portion of the plurality of absorbent articles stored in the packaging bag is exposed. As a result, when the absorbent article is taken out, each of the absorbent articles can be easily seen at the opening, and the upper surface portion of the absorbent article can be less likely to be caught by the upper end of the opening. can. Therefore, the absorbent article can be more easily removed from the opening.
 [態様15]
 前記複数の側面部の各々において、前記幅方向又は前記奥行方向における前記二本の縦弱め線間の距離は、前記幅方向又は前記奥行方向における前記複数の側面部の各々の長さの30%以上、80%以下である、態様12乃至14のいずれか一項に記載の包装体。
 本包装体では、二本の縦弱め線間の距離は、側面部の長さの30%以上、80%以下である。すなわち、開封部の開口部の長さを側面部の長さの30%~80%とし、側面部の開口部以外の部分の長さを側面部の長さの70~20%としている。開封部の開口部の長さを30%以上とすることで、開口部の間口が広がるので、開口部から吸収性物品をより容易に取り出すことができる。更に、開封部の開口部の長さを80%以下とすることで、側面部の開口部以外の部分の長さを20%超とできるので、包装体(包装袋)の形状を崩れに難くすることができる。よって、包装袋の全体の形状を崩さずに、側面部から吸収性物品を容易に取り出すことができる。
[Aspect 15]
In each of the plurality of side surface portions, the distance between the two vertical weakening lines in the width direction or the depth direction is 30% of the length of each of the plurality of side surface portions in the width direction or the depth direction. The package according to any one of aspects 12 to 14, which is 80% or less.
In this package, the distance between the two vertical weakening lines is 30% or more and 80% or less of the length of the side surface portion. That is, the length of the opening of the opened portion is 30% to 80% of the length of the side surface portion, and the length of the portion other than the opening of the side surface portion is 70 to 20% of the length of the side surface portion. By setting the length of the opening of the opened portion to 30% or more, the frontage of the opening is widened, so that the absorbent article can be more easily taken out from the opening. Furthermore, by setting the length of the opening of the opened portion to 80% or less, the length of the portion other than the opening of the side portion can be made to exceed 20%, so that the shape of the package (packaging bag) is not easily deformed. can do. Therefore, the absorbent article can be easily taken out from the side surface portion without breaking the overall shape of the packaging bag.
 [態様16]
 前記横弱め線における前記幅方向又は奥行方向の中央部分を構成する弱め部同士の距離は、前記二本の縦弱め線の各々を構成する弱め部同士の距離よりも短い、態様12乃至15のいずれか一項に記載の包装体。
 本包装体では、横弱め線における幅方向の中央部分を構成する弱め部同士の距離は、二本の縦弱め線の各々を構成する弱め部同士の距離よりも短い。そのため、開封部を開封するとき、横弱め線の中央部分に指を入れたとき、隣り合う弱め部同士に切り離しの力を伝搬させ易くすることができる。それにより、横弱め線の切り離しを容易に開始することができ、更に、横弱め線の切り離しに続けて、二本の縦弱め線の各々の切り離しを容易に行うことができる。したがって、開封部の開口部の形成を容易に行うことができ、吸収性物品を開口部からより容易に取り出すことができる。
[Aspect 16]
Aspects 12 to 15, wherein the distance between the weakening portions constituting the central portion in the width direction or the depth direction of the horizontal weakening line is shorter than the distance between the weakening portions constituting each of the two vertical weakening lines. The package according to any one of the items.
In this package, the distance between the weakening portions constituting the central portion in the width direction of the horizontal weakening line is shorter than the distance between the weakening portions constituting each of the two vertical weakening lines. Therefore, when opening the opened portion, when a finger is put in the central portion of the lateral weakening line, it is possible to easily propagate the separating force to the adjacent weakening portions. Thereby, the separation of the horizontal weakening line can be easily started, and further, the separation of each of the two vertical weakening lines can be easily performed following the separation of the horizontal weakening line. Therefore, the opening of the opened portion can be easily formed, and the absorbent article can be more easily taken out from the opening.
 [態様17]
 前記複数の吸収性物品は、前記上下方向に少なくとも二段に積層されており、前記二本の縦弱め線における前記上下方向の下端の位置は、前記複数の吸収性物品のうちの最上段の吸収性物品における前記上下方向の下端の位置よりも高く、前記最上段の吸収性物品における前記上下方向の中間の位置よりも低い、態様12乃至16のいずれか一項に記載の包装体。
 本包装体では、複数の吸収性物品のうちの最上段の吸収性物品については、開封部を開封したとき、吸収性物品が意図せずに開口部から外部へ脱落することを抑制できる。更に、吸収性物品を取り出すとき、他の吸収性物品が意図せずに開口部から外部へ脱落することを抑制できる。更に、吸収性物品を取り出すとき、開口部に引っ掛かることを抑制できる。また、複数の吸収性物品が少なくとも二段に積層されていても、上側の段の吸収性物品から順に取り出せるので、吸収性物品の一部又は全部が開口部から外にこぼれ出ることもなく、吸収性物品を容易に取り出すことができる。また、未使用の下側の段の吸収性物品は取り出すまで包装袋に覆われているので、その清潔性を保つことができる。このように、この包装体において、開口部からの吸収性物品の脱落を抑制することと、開口部からの吸収性物品の取り出しを容易にすることとを両立でき、下側の段の吸収性物品の清潔性を保つことができる。
[Aspect 17]
The plurality of absorbent articles are laminated in at least two stages in the vertical direction, and the position of the lower end in the vertical direction on the two vertical weakening lines is the uppermost stage of the plurality of absorbent articles. The package according to any one of aspects 12 to 16, which is higher than the position of the lower end in the vertical direction of the absorbent article and lower than the position of the middle position in the vertical direction of the uppermost absorbent article.
In this package, when the opening portion of the uppermost absorbent article among the plurality of absorbent articles is opened, it is possible to prevent the absorbent article from unintentionally falling out of the opening. Further, when the absorbent article is taken out, it is possible to prevent other absorbent articles from unintentionally falling out of the opening. Further, when the absorbent article is taken out, it can be prevented from being caught in the opening. Further, even if a plurality of absorbent articles are stacked in at least two stages, the absorbent articles in the upper stage can be taken out in order, so that part or all of the absorbent articles does not spill out from the opening. The absorbent article can be easily taken out. Further, since the unused absorbent article in the lower stage is covered with the packaging bag until it is taken out, its cleanliness can be maintained. As described above, in this package, it is possible to suppress the falling of the absorbent article from the opening and to facilitate the removal of the absorbent article from the opening, and it is possible to achieve both the absorbency of the lower stage. The cleanliness of the goods can be maintained.
 [態様18]
 前記右面部及び前記左面部の少なくとも一方と、前記前面部及び前記後面部の少なくとも一方と、において、前記二本の縦弱め線における前記上下方向の下端の位置は同じである、態様12乃至17のいずれか一項に記載の包装体。
 本包装体は、右面部及び左面部の少なくとも一方と、前面部及び後面部の少なくとも一方と、において、二本の縦弱め線における下端の位置は同じである。そのため、右面部又は左面部の開封部、すなわち幅方向に開口する開封部と、前面部又は後面部の開封部、すなわち奥行方向に開口する開封部と、を両方開封しても、開口部の下端の位置を同じに揃えることができる。それにより、使用者が、いずれか一方の開封部の下端の位置を一度把握してしまえば、いずれの開封部から吸収性物品を取り出す場合でも、下端の位置をその度に目で見て確認しなくても、側面部から吸収性物品を容易に取り出すことができる。
[Aspect 18]
At least one of the right surface portion and the left surface portion, and at least one of the front surface portion and the rear surface portion, the positions of the lower ends in the vertical direction on the two vertical weakening lines are the same, embodiments 12 to 17. The package according to any one of the items.
In this package, the positions of the lower ends of the two vertical weakening lines are the same on at least one of the right surface portion and the left surface portion and at least one of the front surface portion and the rear surface portion. Therefore, even if both the opening portion of the right surface portion or the left surface portion, that is, the opening portion that opens in the width direction, and the opening portion of the front portion or the rear surface portion, that is, the opening portion that opens in the depth direction are opened, the opening portion of the opening portion. The positions of the lower ends can be aligned in the same way. As a result, once the user grasps the position of the lower end of one of the opening portions, the position of the lower end is visually confirmed each time even when the absorbent article is taken out from any opening portion. The absorbent article can be easily taken out from the side surface portion without doing so.
 [態様19]
 前記右面部及び前記左面部の少なくとも一方と、前記前面部及び前記後面部の少なくとも一方と、において、前記二本の縦弱め線における前記上下方向の上端の位置は、同じである、態様12乃至18のいずれか一項に記載の包装体。
 本包装体では、右面部及び左面部の少なくとも一方と、前面部及び後面部の少なくとも一方と、において、二本の縦弱め線における上端の位置は同じである。そのため、右面部又は左面部の開封部、すなわち幅方向に開口する開封部と、前面部又は後面部の開封部、すなわち奥行方向に開口する開封部と、を両方開封しても、開口部の上端の位置を同じに揃えることができる。それにより、使用者が、いずれか一方の開封部の上端の位置を一度把握してしまえば、いずれの開封部から吸収性物品を取り出す場合でも、上端の位置をその度に目で見て確認しなくても、側面部から吸収性物品を容易に取り出すことができる。
[Aspect 19]
At least one of the right surface portion and the left surface portion, and at least one of the front surface portion and the rear surface portion, the positions of the upper ends in the vertical direction on the two vertical weakening lines are the same, aspects 12 to 12 to The package according to any one of 18.
In this package, the positions of the upper ends of the two vertical weakening lines are the same in at least one of the right surface portion and the left surface portion and at least one of the front surface portion and the rear surface portion. Therefore, even if both the opening portion of the right surface portion or the left surface portion, that is, the opening portion that opens in the width direction, and the opening portion of the front portion or the rear surface portion, that is, the opening portion that opens in the depth direction are opened, the opening portion of the opening portion. The positions of the upper ends can be aligned in the same way. As a result, once the user grasps the position of the upper end of one of the opening portions, the position of the upper end is visually confirmed each time even when the absorbent article is taken out from any opening portion. The absorbent article can be easily taken out from the side surface portion without doing so.
 [態様20]
 前記右面部及び前記左面部の少なくとも一方における、前記二本の縦弱め線のうちの前記前面部側の縦弱め線と、前記右面部及び前記左面部の少なくとも一方と前記前面部との境界線と、の距離は、前記前面部における、前記二本の縦弱め線のうちの前記右面部及び前記左面部の少なくとも一方の側の縦弱め線と、前記境界線と、の距離と、同じであり、前記右面部及び前記左面部の少なくとも一方における、前記二本の縦弱め線のうちの前記後面部側の縦弱め線と、前記右面部及び前記左面部の少なくとも一方と前記後面部との境界線と、の距離は、前記後面部における、前記二本の縦弱め線のうちの前記右面部及び前記左面部の少なくとも一方の側の縦弱め線と、当該境界線と、の距離と、同じである、態様18又は19に記載の包装体。
 本包装体では、右面部又は左面部における前面部側の縦弱め線と、右面部又は左面部と前面部との境界線と、の距離は、前面部における右面部側又は左面部側の縦弱め線と、当該境界線と、の距離と、同じである。同様に、本包装体では、右面部又は左面部における後面部側の縦弱め線と、右面部又は左面部と後面部との境界線と、の距離は、後面部における右面部側又は左面部側の縦弱め線と、当該境界線と、の距離と、同じである。ここで、右面部又は左面部における前面部側の縦弱め線と、境界線と、の距離は、右面部又は左面部における開封部の開口部の両外側の各々の部分の幅である。一方、前面部における右面部側又は左面部側の縦弱め線と、境界線と、の距離は、前面部における開封部の開口部の両外側の各々の部分の幅である。同様に、右面部又は左面部における後面部側の縦弱め線と、境界線と、の距離は、右面部又は左面部における開封部の開口部の両外側の各々の部分の幅である。一方、後面部における右面部側又は左面部側の縦弱め線と、境界線と、の距離は、後面部における開封部の開口部の両外側の部分の幅である。これら各開封部の開口部の両外側の部分は、開封後の各側面部の形状の維持、延いては包装体の形状の維持に必要な部分である。したがって、これらの部分の幅のバランスが悪いと、開封後の側面部や包装体の形状の維持が困難となる。そこで、この包装体では、これらの幅が側面部ごとに大きく異なることがないように所定の同一の幅を持たせている。それにより、開封後の側面部や包装体の形状を維持し易くしている。それにより、開封部の開口部の形状が維持されて、吸収性物品の取り出し易さを維持できる。
[Aspect 20]
The vertical weakening line on the front surface side of the two vertical weakening lines on at least one of the right surface portion and the left surface portion, and the boundary line between at least one of the right surface portion and the left surface portion and the front surface portion. The distance between and is the same as the distance between the boundary line and the vertical weakening line on at least one side of the right surface portion and the left surface portion of the two vertical weakening lines in the front surface portion. Yes, there is a vertical weakening line on the rear surface side of the two vertical weakening lines on at least one of the right surface portion and the left surface portion, and at least one of the right surface portion and the left surface portion and the rear surface portion. The distance between the boundary line and the boundary line is the distance between the boundary line and the vertical weakening line on at least one side of the right surface portion and the left surface portion of the two vertical weakening lines in the rear surface portion. The packaging according to aspect 18 or 19, which is the same.
In this package, the distance between the vertical weakening line on the front side of the right side or the left side and the boundary line between the right side or the left side and the front part is the vertical on the right side or the left side of the front part. The distance between the weakening line and the boundary line is the same. Similarly, in the present package, the distance between the vertical weakening line on the rear surface side on the right surface portion or the left surface portion and the boundary line between the right surface portion or the left surface portion and the rear surface portion is the distance between the right surface portion side or the left surface portion on the rear surface portion. The distance between the vertical weakening line on the side and the boundary line is the same. Here, the distance between the vertical weakening line on the front surface side of the right surface portion or the left surface portion and the boundary line is the width of each portion on both outer sides of the opening of the opening portion on the right surface portion or the left surface portion. On the other hand, the distance between the vertical weakening line on the right side or the left side of the front surface portion and the boundary line is the width of each portion on both outer sides of the opening portion of the opening portion in the front surface portion. Similarly, the distance between the vertical weakening line on the rear surface side of the right surface portion or the left surface portion and the boundary line is the width of each portion on both outer sides of the opening of the opening portion on the right surface portion or the left surface portion. On the other hand, the distance between the vertical weakening line on the right side or the left side of the rear surface portion and the boundary line is the width of both outer portions of the opening of the opening portion on the rear surface portion. Both outer portions of the openings of each of these opened portions are necessary for maintaining the shape of each side surface portion after opening, and by extension, maintaining the shape of the package. Therefore, if the widths of these portions are not well balanced, it becomes difficult to maintain the shape of the side surface portion and the package after opening. Therefore, in this package, a predetermined same width is provided so that these widths do not differ greatly from side to side. This makes it easier to maintain the shape of the side surface and the package after opening. As a result, the shape of the opening of the opened portion can be maintained, and the ease of taking out the absorbent article can be maintained.
 [態様21]
 幅方向、奥行方向及び上下方向を有し、前面部、後面部、右面部、及び左面部を含む複数の側面部を備え、前記複数の側面部の少なくとも一つに開封部を含み、前記開封部は、前記上下方向に沿って延び、前記幅方向又は前記奥行方向に間隔を空けて並んだ二本の縦弱め線と、前記幅方向又は前記奥行方向に沿って延び、前記二本の縦弱め線における前記上下方向の上側の端部同士をつなぐ横弱め線と、を含む、複数の吸収性物品を収納可能な包装袋であって、搬送方向、横断方向、及び厚さ方向を有し、前記搬送方向に沿って延びる筒状の樹脂シート部材における、前記横断方向の両側を、それぞれ前記横断方向の内側に向かって谷折りで折り畳むことにより、前記厚さ方向の一方側及び他方側にそれぞれ位置する前記前面部及び前記後面部と、前記前面部と前記後面部との間に折り畳まれ、前記横断方向の右側及び左側にそれぞれ位置する前記右面部及び前記左面部と、を形成する側面形成工程と、前記前面部及び前記後面部のうちの一方側から他方側に向かって弱め線形成刃を押し付けることにより、前記前面部及び前記後面部に、前記搬送方向に延びる前記二本の縦弱め線及び前記横断方向に延びる前記横弱め線を形成すると同時に、前記右面部及び前記左面部に、前記二本の縦弱め線及び前記横弱め線を形成する弱め線形成工程と、を備え、前記二本の縦弱め線における前記搬送方向の下端の位置は、前記包装袋に前記複数の吸収性物品が収納されているとき、前記複数の吸収性物品における前記搬送方向に平行な前記上下方向の下端の位置よりも高く、前記複数の吸収性物品における前記上下方向の中間の位置よりも低くなるように、形成される、包装袋の製造方法。
[Aspect 21]
It has a width direction, a depth direction, and a vertical direction, has a plurality of side surface portions including a front surface portion, a rear surface portion, a right surface portion, and a left surface portion, and at least one of the plurality of side surface portions includes an opening portion, and the opening portion is included. The portion extends along the vertical direction and extends along the width direction or the depth direction and two vertical weakening lines arranged at intervals in the width direction or the depth direction. A packaging bag capable of storing a plurality of absorbent articles, including a lateral weakening line connecting the upper ends of the weakening line in the vertical direction, having a transport direction, a transverse direction, and a thickness direction. In the tubular resin sheet member extending along the transport direction, both sides in the transverse direction are folded in a valley fold toward the inside of the transverse direction, so that one side and the other side in the thickness direction can be obtained. A side surface that is folded between the front surface portion and the rear surface portion and forms the right surface portion and the left surface portion that are located on the right side and the left side in the transverse direction, respectively. By pressing the weakening line forming blade from one side of the front surface portion and the rear surface portion toward the other side in the forming step, the two vertical lengths extending in the transport direction are applied to the front surface portion and the rear surface portion. At the same time as forming the weakening line and the horizontal weakening line extending in the transverse direction, the right surface portion and the left surface portion are provided with a weakening line forming step of forming the two vertical weakening lines and the horizontal weakening line. The position of the lower end of the two vertical weakening lines in the transport direction is the vertical direction parallel to the transport direction of the plurality of absorbent articles when the plurality of absorbent articles are stored in the packaging bag. A method of manufacturing a packaging bag, which is formed so as to be higher than the position of the lower end of the container and lower than the position in the middle of the vertical direction in the plurality of absorbent articles.
 本包装体では、一つの弱め線形成刃により、前面部及び後面部における横弱め線及び二本の縦弱め線の形成により、同時に、右面部及び左面部における横弱め線及び二本の縦弱め線を形成することができる。それにより、弱め線を容易に形成できると共に、弱め線の形成の工数を削減でき、製造設備の削減等によるコスト低減が可能となる。そして、この包装袋に複数の吸収性物品を収納することで、開口部からの吸収性物品の脱落を抑制することと、開口部からの吸収性物品の取り出しを容易にすることとを両立し得る包装体を容易に形成できる。 In this package, one weakening line forming blade forms a horizontal weakening line and two vertical weakening lines on the front and rear surfaces, and at the same time, a horizontal weakening line and two vertical weakening lines on the right side and the left side. Lines can be formed. As a result, the weakening wire can be easily formed, the man-hours for forming the weakening wire can be reduced, and the cost can be reduced by reducing the manufacturing equipment and the like. By storing a plurality of absorbent articles in this packaging bag, it is possible to prevent the absorbent articles from falling out from the opening and to facilitate the removal of the absorbent articles from the opening. The resulting package can be easily formed.
 以下、実施形態に係る包装体について説明する。ただし、本明細書において、ある方向に「沿う」とは、その方向に対して±30°の範囲の方向に沿うことを含むものとする。また、ある部材等のある方向の端部とは、その部材のその方向の端縁から、その部材等のその方向での全体の長さの1/5(好ましくは1/10)以下の長さの範囲をいう。 Hereinafter, the packaging body according to the embodiment will be described. However, in the present specification, "along" in a certain direction includes the direction in the range of ± 30 ° with respect to the direction. Further, the end portion of a member or the like in a certain direction is a length of 1/5 (preferably 1/10) or less of the total length of the member or the like in the direction from the edge of the member in the direction. The range of the length.
 [第1実施形態]
 第1実施形態について説明する。図1~図4は実施形態に係る包装体1の構成例を示す模式図である。ただし、図1は包装体1の構成例を模式的に示す斜視図であり、図2は包装体1の構成例を模式的に示す正面図であり、図3は包装体1の構成例を模式的に示す右側面図である。図4は包装体1の包装袋2を模式的に示す展開図である。
[First Embodiment]
The first embodiment will be described. 1 to 4 are schematic views showing a configuration example of the package 1 according to the embodiment. However, FIG. 1 is a perspective view schematically showing a configuration example of the package 1, FIG. 2 is a front view schematically showing a configuration example of the package 1, and FIG. 3 is a configuration example of the package 1. It is a right side view schematically shown. FIG. 4 is a developed view schematically showing the packaging bag 2 of the packaging body 1.
 包装体1は、互いに直交する幅方向W、奥行方向D、及び上下方向Tを有している。そして、包装体1は、複数の吸収性物品3と、複数の側面部を含み、複数の吸収性物品3を収納する包装袋2と、を備えている。複数の側面部は、前面部11、後面部12、右面部13及び左面部14を含んでいる。前面部11及び後面部12は包装体1(包装袋2)の前面及び後面を構成する部分であり、前面部11及び後面部12の一方から他方へ向かう方向が奥行方向Dである。右面部13及び左面部14は包装体1(包装袋2)の右面及び左面を構成する部分であり、右面部13及び左面部14の一方から他方へ向かう方向が幅方向Wである。互いに隣り合う前面部11、右面部13、後面部12及び左面部14で構成される筒の延びる方向が上下方向Tである。なお、複数の側面部は、包装袋2の側面部であると共に、包装体1の側面部でもあるから、包装体1が複数の側面部を有する、ということもできる。 The package 1 has a width direction W, a depth direction D, and a vertical direction T that are orthogonal to each other. The package 1 includes a plurality of absorbent articles 3 and a packaging bag 2 including a plurality of side surface portions and accommodating the plurality of absorbent articles 3. The plurality of side surface portions include a front surface portion 11, a rear surface portion 12, a right surface portion 13, and a left surface portion 14. The front surface portion 11 and the rear surface portion 12 are portions constituting the front surface and the rear surface of the package 1 (packaging bag 2), and the direction from one of the front surface portion 11 and the rear surface portion 12 to the other is the depth direction D. The right surface portion 13 and the left surface portion 14 are portions constituting the right surface and the left surface of the package 1 (packaging bag 2), and the direction from one of the right surface portion 13 and the left surface portion 14 to the other is the width direction W. The vertical direction T is the extending direction of the cylinder composed of the front surface portion 11, the right surface portion 13, the rear surface portion 12, and the left surface portion 14 adjacent to each other. Since the plurality of side surface portions are not only the side surface portions of the packaging bag 2 but also the side surface portions of the packaging body 1, it can be said that the packaging body 1 has a plurality of side surface portions.
 包装体1(包装袋2)は、互いに隣接する側面部同士が交わる部分に角部19を有している。すなわち、前面部11と右面部13とが交わる部分、前面部11と左面部14とが交わる部分、後面部12と右面部13とが交わる部分、及び後面部12と左面部14とが交わる部分の各々に角部19を有している。ここで、互いに隣接する側面部同士の境界を境界線CLとすると、前面部11と右面部13との境界、前面部11と左面部14との境界、後面部12と右面部13との境界、及び、後面部12と左面部14との境界に境界線CLが存在する。したがって、角部19は境界線CLを含む領域である。本実施形態では、境界線CLは、角部19における包装体1(包装袋2)の表面に沿い、底面部16(後述)に平行な方向の中心に位置している。なお、図4は、包装袋2を後面部12と左面部14との境界線CLで切断して展開した図である。 The packaging body 1 (packaging bag 2) has a corner portion 19 at a portion where side surface portions adjacent to each other intersect with each other. That is, a portion where the front surface portion 11 and the right surface portion 13 intersect, a portion where the front surface portion 11 and the left surface portion 14 intersect, a portion where the rear surface portion 12 and the right surface portion 13 intersect, and a portion where the rear surface portion 12 and the left surface portion 14 intersect. Each of the above has a corner portion 19. Here, assuming that the boundary between the side surface portions adjacent to each other is the boundary line CL, the boundary between the front surface portion 11 and the right surface portion 13, the boundary between the front surface portion 11 and the left surface portion 14, and the boundary between the rear surface portion 12 and the right surface portion 13. , And the boundary line CL exists at the boundary between the rear surface portion 12 and the left surface portion 14. Therefore, the corner portion 19 is a region including the boundary line CL. In the present embodiment, the boundary line CL is located at the center of the corner portion 19 along the surface of the package 1 (packaging bag 2) in the direction parallel to the bottom surface portion 16 (described later). Note that FIG. 4 is a view obtained by cutting the packaging bag 2 at the boundary line CL between the rear surface portion 12 and the left surface portion 14 and developing the packaging bag 2.
 本実施形態では、包装袋2は、ポリエチレン、ポリプロピレン、ポリエチレンテレフタレートのような合成樹脂で形成されたシート部材で構成されている。包装袋2には、複数の吸収性物品3が、縦置きされた状態で、幅方向Wに重ねられ一列に並べられつつ、上下方向Tに三段重ねられて収納されている。ただし、複数の吸収性物品3の包装袋2への収納方法は特に制限されず任意である。例えば、複数の吸収性物品3は、上下方向Tに一段でもよく、二段又は四段以上であってもよく、奥行方向Dに重ねられてもよく、各段において二列以上に並べられてもよい。また、本実施形態では、吸収性物品3は尿取りパッドである。ただし、吸収性物品3の種類はこの例に限定されるものではなく、本発明の趣旨の範囲を逸脱しない限り、他の吸収性物品でもよい。他の吸収性物品としては、生理用ナプキン、失禁パッド、パンツ型おむつ、テープ型おむつ、などが挙げられる。なお、包装体1に内包される折り畳まれた吸収性物品3の大きさは、特に制限はないが、例えば、5~30cm×5~40cm×1~10cmが挙げられる。 In the present embodiment, the packaging bag 2 is composed of a sheet member made of a synthetic resin such as polyethylene, polypropylene, and polyethylene terephthalate. In the packaging bag 2, a plurality of absorbent articles 3 are stacked vertically in a state where they are stacked vertically in the width direction W and arranged in a row, and are stored in three layers in the vertical direction T. However, the method of storing the plurality of absorbent articles 3 in the packaging bag 2 is not particularly limited and is arbitrary. For example, the plurality of absorbent articles 3 may be one step in the vertical direction T, two or four steps or more, may be stacked in the depth direction D, and may be arranged in two or more rows in each step. May be good. Further, in the present embodiment, the absorbent article 3 is a urine collecting pad. However, the type of the absorbent article 3 is not limited to this example, and other absorbent articles may be used as long as they do not deviate from the scope of the present invention. Other absorbent articles include sanitary napkins, incontinence pads, pants-type diapers, tape-type diapers, and the like. The size of the folded absorbent article 3 contained in the package 1 is not particularly limited, and examples thereof include 5 to 30 cm × 5 to 40 cm × 1 to 10 cm.
 本実施形態では、包装体1(包装袋2)は直方体の形状を有しており、したがって、その各側面部、すなわち前面部11、後面部12、右面部13及び左面部14の各々は矩形の形状を有している。ただし、包装体1は、主に変形容易なシート部材及び吸収性物品で構成されているので、厳密な直方体の形状を有していなくてもよく、各側面部が厳密な矩形の形状を有していなくてもよい。例えば、吸収性物品3が圧縮されて包装袋2に収納され、その後に吸収性物品3が膨張して包装袋2が内側から伸長した状態のように、側面部の一部又は全部や、角部19の一部又は全部が、曲面を有していたり、丸みを帯びていたり、凸凹を有していたりしてもよい。なお、包装体1(包装袋2)の大きさは、特に制限はないが、例えば、幅方向Wの長さ10~80cm、奥行方向Dの長さ10~80cm、上下方向Tの長さ10~100cmが挙げられる。 In the present embodiment, the package 1 (packaging bag 2) has a rectangular parallelepiped shape, and therefore each of the side surface portions thereof, that is, the front surface portion 11, the rear surface portion 12, the right surface portion 13, and the left surface portion 14 is rectangular. Has the shape of. However, since the package 1 is mainly composed of a easily deformable sheet member and an absorbent article, it does not have to have a strict rectangular parallelepiped shape, and each side surface portion has a strict rectangular shape. You don't have to. For example, a part or all of the side surface portion or a corner, as in a state where the absorbent article 3 is compressed and stored in the packaging bag 2, and then the absorbent article 3 expands and the packaging bag 2 extends from the inside. Part or all of the portion 19 may have a curved surface, be rounded, or have irregularities. The size of the package 1 (packaging bag 2) is not particularly limited, but for example, the length in the width direction W is 10 to 80 cm, the length in the depth direction D is 10 to 80 cm, and the length in the vertical direction T is 10. ~ 100 cm can be mentioned.
 包装体1(包装袋2)は、前面部11及び後面部12の各々において幅方向Wに沿って延びるよう、及び、右面部13及び左面部14の各々において奥行方向Dに沿って延びるように、それぞれ形成された第1弱め線21と、各角部19を跨ぐように形成された第2弱め線22と、を備えている。ここで、第1弱め線21及び第2弱め線22のような弱め線とは、包装袋2のシート部材をその厚さ方向に貫通した部分又は厚さ方向に薄く削ってハーフカットした部分(以下、「弱め部分」ともいう。)が所定の方向に間欠的に複数個並んだものをいい、ミシン目に例示される。弱め線を挟んで両側の部分を、互いに引き離すように引っ張ることで、弱め線に沿って互いに容易に切り離すことができる。 The package 1 (packaging bag 2) extends along the width direction W at each of the front surface portion 11 and the rear surface portion 12, and extends along the depth direction D at each of the right surface portion 13 and the left surface portion 14. , A first weakening line 21 formed respectively, and a second weakening line 22 formed so as to straddle each corner portion 19. Here, the weakening lines such as the first weakening line 21 and the second weakening line 22 are a portion through which the sheet member of the packaging bag 2 is penetrated in the thickness direction or a portion thinly cut in the thickness direction and half-cut (the portion). Hereinafter, a plurality of "weakened portions") are intermittently arranged in a predetermined direction, and are exemplified by perforations. By pulling the portions on both sides of the weakening line so as to separate them from each other, they can be easily separated from each other along the weakening line.
 前面部11には、上下方向Tの上側の部分に、前面部11と右面部13との角部19の近傍から、前面部11と左面部14との角部19の近傍まで、幅方向Wに沿って延びる第1弱め線21が形成されている。同様に、後面部12には、上下方向Tの上側の部分に、後面部12と右面部13との角部19の近傍から、後面部12と左面部14との角部19の近傍まで、幅方向Wに沿って延びる第1弱め線21が形成されている。右面部13には、上下方向Tの上側の部分に、右面部13と前面部11との角部19の近傍から、右面部13と後面部12との角部19の近傍まで、奥行方向Dに沿って延びる第1弱め線21が形成されている。左面部14には、上下方向Tの上側の部分に、左面部14と前面部11との角部19の近傍から、左面部14と後面部12との角部19の近傍まで、奥行方向Dに沿って延びる第1弱め線21が形成されている。 In the front surface portion 11, in the upper portion in the vertical direction T, from the vicinity of the corner portion 19 between the front surface portion 11 and the right surface portion 13 to the vicinity of the corner portion 19 between the front surface portion 11 and the left surface portion 14, the width direction W A first weakening line 21 extending along the line 21 is formed. Similarly, in the rear surface portion 12, in the upper portion in the vertical direction T, from the vicinity of the corner portion 19 of the rear surface portion 12 and the right surface portion 13 to the vicinity of the corner portion 19 of the rear surface portion 12 and the left surface portion 14. A first weakening line 21 extending along the width direction W is formed. In the right surface portion 13, in the upper portion in the vertical direction T, from the vicinity of the corner portion 19 between the right surface portion 13 and the front surface portion 11 to the vicinity of the corner portion 19 between the right surface portion 13 and the rear surface portion 12, the depth direction D A first weakening line 21 extending along the line 21 is formed. In the left surface portion 14, in the upper portion in the vertical direction T, from the vicinity of the corner portion 19 between the left surface portion 14 and the front surface portion 11 to the vicinity of the corner portion 19 between the left surface portion 14 and the rear surface portion 12, the depth direction D A first weakening line 21 extending along the line 21 is formed.
 そして、前面部11と右面部13との角部19を跨いで、前面部11における幅方向Wの右面部13側の端部から、右面部13における奥行方向Dの前面部11側の端部まで、第2弱め線22が形成されている。同様に、前面部11と左面部14との角部19を跨いで、前面部11における幅方向Wの左面部14側の端部から、左面部14における奥行方向Dの前面部11側の端部まで、第2弱め線22が形成されている。後面部12と右面部13との角部19を跨いで、後面部12における幅方向Wの右面部13側の端部から、右面部13における奥行方向Dの後面部12側の端部まで、第2弱め線22が形成されている。後面部12と左面部14との角部19を跨いで、後面部12における幅方向Wの左面部14側の端部から、左面部14における奥行方向Dの後面部12側の端部まで、第2弱め線22が形成されている。 Then, straddling the corner portion 19 between the front surface portion 11 and the right surface portion 13, from the end portion on the right surface portion 13 side in the width direction W in the front surface portion 11 to the end portion on the front surface portion 11 side in the depth direction D in the right surface portion 13. Up to, the second weakening line 22 is formed. Similarly, straddling the corner portion 19 between the front surface portion 11 and the left surface portion 14, from the end portion of the front surface portion 11 on the left surface portion 14 side in the width direction W to the end of the left surface portion 14 on the front surface portion 11 side in the depth direction D. The second weakening line 22 is formed up to the portion. Straddling the corner portion 19 of the rear surface portion 12 and the right surface portion 13, from the end portion of the rear surface portion 12 on the right surface portion 13 side in the width direction W to the end portion of the right surface portion 13 on the rear surface portion 12 side in the depth direction D. The second weakening line 22 is formed. Straddling the corner portion 19 of the rear surface portion 12 and the left surface portion 14, from the end portion of the rear surface portion 12 on the left surface portion 14 side in the width direction W to the end portion of the left surface portion 14 on the rear surface portion 12 side in the depth direction D. The second weakening line 22 is formed.
 本実施形態では、包装体1(包装袋2)は、前面部11、後面部12、右面部13及び左面部14の各々の第1弱め線21及び第2弱め線22よりも上下方向Tの上側の部分で形成された上面部15を更に含んでいる。上面部15は、前面部11、後面部12、右面部13及び左面部14の各々の上下方向Tの上側の端部が互いに熱融着された結合部17を含んでいる。結合部17は、弱め線で形成された取手部18を含んでいる。包装体1(包装袋2)は、前面部11、後面部12、右面部13及び左面部14の各々の上下方向Tの下側の端部が互いに熱融着された底面部16を更に有している。包装体1(包装袋2)は、上面部15、前面部11、後面部12、右面部13、左面部14及び底面部16により複数の吸収性物品3を包んでいる。 In the present embodiment, the package 1 (packaging bag 2) is in the vertical direction T from the first weakening line 21 and the second weakening line 22 of the front surface portion 11, the rear surface portion 12, the right surface portion 13 and the left surface portion 14, respectively. It further includes an upper surface portion 15 formed by the upper portion. The upper surface portion 15 includes a coupling portion 17 in which the upper end portions of the front surface portion 11, the rear surface portion 12, the right surface portion 13, and the left surface portion 14 are heat-sealed to each other in the vertical direction T. The connecting portion 17 includes a handle portion 18 formed of a weakening line. The package 1 (packaging bag 2) further has a bottom surface portion 16 in which the lower end portions of each of the front surface portion 11, the rear surface portion 12, the right surface portion 13, and the left surface portion 14 are heat-sealed to each other in the vertical direction T. doing. The package 1 (packaging bag 2) encloses a plurality of absorbent articles 3 by an upper surface portion 15, a front surface portion 11, a rear surface portion 12, a right surface portion 13, a left surface portion 14, and a bottom surface portion 16.
 なお、包装体1(包装袋2)は、前面部11、後面部12、右面部13及び左面部14の少なくとも一つに開封部20を備えてもよいし、備えなくてもよい。包装体1(包装袋2)が開封部20を備える場合には、その開封部20は、弱め線である二本の縦弱め線25と、横弱め線24と、を含んでいる。二本の縦弱め線25は、上下方向Tに沿って延び、幅方向W又は奥行方向Dに間隔を空けて並んでいる。横弱め線24は、幅方向W又は奥行方向Dに沿って延び、二本の縦弱め線25における上下方向Tの上側の端部同士をつないでいる。この場合、横弱め線24及び二本の縦弱め線25の切り離しを行うことで、開封部20を開口して、吸収性物品3を取り出してもよい。 The packaging body 1 (packaging bag 2) may or may not have an opening portion 20 in at least one of the front surface portion 11, the rear surface portion 12, the right surface portion 13, and the left surface portion 14. When the package 1 (packaging bag 2) includes an opening portion 20, the opening portion 20 includes two vertical weakening lines 25 which are weakening lines and a horizontal weakening line 24. The two vertical weakening lines 25 extend along the vertical direction T and are arranged at intervals in the width direction W or the depth direction D. The lateral weakening line 24 extends along the width direction W or the depth direction D, and connects the upper ends of the two vertical weakening lines 25 in the vertical direction T. In this case, the opening portion 20 may be opened and the absorbent article 3 may be taken out by separating the horizontal weakening line 24 and the two vertical weakening lines 25.
 図5は、実施形態に係る包装体1の第1弱め線21及び第2弱め線22の構成例を示す模式図である。具体的には、角部19及びその近傍における第1弱め線21と第2弱め線22との位置関係を、包装体1(包装袋2)の表面に沿って示す模式図である。 FIG. 5 is a schematic diagram showing a configuration example of the first weakening line 21 and the second weakening line 22 of the package 1 according to the embodiment. Specifically, it is a schematic diagram which shows the positional relationship between the 1st weakening line 21 and the 2nd weakening line 22 in a corner portion 19 and its vicinity along the surface of a package 1 (packaging bag 2).
 図5に示すように、隣り合う第1弱め線21同士は、角部19で互いに離間している。よって、角部19における隣り合う第1弱め線21同士の距離をd2とすると、少なくともd2>0である。隣り合う第1弱め線21と第2弱め線22とは、互いに離間している。よって、隣り合う第1弱め線21と第2弱め線22との距離をd1とすると、少なくともd1>0である。そして、隣り合う第2弱め線22と第1弱め線21との距離d1は、隣り合う第1弱め線同士の距離d2よりも短い(d1<d2)。すなわち、隣り合う第2弱め線22と第1弱め線21との距離d1は相対的に短くなっている。ただし、距離d1、d2は、包装袋2の表面伝いに測定される最短の距離である。更に、第2弱め線22の端部の延長線L0は、第2弱め線22の端部と隣り合う第1弱め線21と交差している。なお、第2弱め線22が曲線のときには、第2弱め線22の端部の接線を延長線L0とする。 As shown in FIG. 5, the adjacent first weakening lines 21 are separated from each other at the corners 19. Therefore, if the distance between the adjacent first weakening lines 21 at the corner portion 19 is d2, at least d2> 0. The adjacent first weakening line 21 and the second weakening line 22 are separated from each other. Therefore, if the distance between the adjacent first weakening line 21 and the second weakening line 22 is d1, at least d1> 0. The distance d1 between the adjacent second weakening line 22 and the first weakening line 21 is shorter than the distance d2 between the adjacent first weakening lines (d1 <d2). That is, the distance d1 between the adjacent second weakening line 22 and the first weakening line 21 is relatively short. However, the distances d1 and d2 are the shortest distances measured along the surface of the packaging bag 2. Further, the extension line L0 at the end of the second weakening line 22 intersects the first weakening line 21 adjacent to the end of the second weakening line 22. When the second weakening line 22 is a curved line, the tangent line at the end of the second weakening line 22 is an extension line L0.
 なお、包装体1の大きさにも依存するが、d1の大きさとしては0.1~4cmが挙げられ、0.5~3cmが好ましい。下限は、第1弱め線21の切り離しが第2弱め線22へ不要なときに伝搬するのを抑制する観点であり、上限は、第2弱め線22の切り離しが第1弱め線21へ必要なときに伝搬し難くなるのを抑制する観点である(後述)。d2の大きさとしては2~15cmが挙げられ、3~10cmが好ましい。下限は第1弱め線21の切り離しが隣接する第1弱め線21へ伝搬するのを抑制する観点であり、上限は弱め線の切り離しが必要なときに切り離し難くなるのを抑制する観点である。また、包装袋2の表面伝いに測定される第2弱め線22の長さd3は、2~15cmが挙げられる。 Although it depends on the size of the package 1, the size of d1 is 0.1 to 4 cm, preferably 0.5 to 3 cm. The lower limit is a viewpoint of suppressing propagation of the first weakening line 21 to the second weakening line 22 when it is unnecessary, and the upper limit is the viewpoint that the disconnection of the second weakening line 22 is required to the first weakening line 21. This is a viewpoint to prevent it from becoming difficult to propagate (described later). The size of d2 is 2 to 15 cm, preferably 3 to 10 cm. The lower limit is a viewpoint of suppressing the disconnection of the first weakening line 21 from propagating to the adjacent first weakening line 21, and the upper limit is a viewpoint of suppressing the disconnection of the weakening line 21 from becoming difficult when it is necessary. Further, the length d3 of the second weakening line 22 measured along the surface of the packaging bag 2 is 2 to 15 cm.
 図6は、実施形態に係る包装体1を完全に又は部分的に開封する態様を示す模式図である。図6(a)に示すように、包装体1を完全に開封する態様では、複数の側面部すべてにおいて、第1弱め線21及び第2弱め線22の切り離しが行われる。それにより、複数の側面部すべてにおいて、第1切断線21a及び第2切断線22aが形成され、上面部15が取り除かれて、開口部OPが形成される。使用者は、開口部OPから吸収性物品3を取り出し得る。一方、図6(b)に示すように、包装体1を部分的に開封する態様では、複数の側面部のうちの一部(例示:前面部11、右面部13及び左面部14)において、第1弱め線21及び第2弱め線22の切り離しが行われる。それにより、複数の側面部のうちの一部(例示:前面部11、右面部13及び左面部14)において、第1切断線21a及び第2切断線22aが形成され、開口部OPが形成される。使用者は、開口部OPから吸収性物品3を取り出し得る。加えて、使用者は、上面部15が複数の側面部のうちの他の一部分(例示:後面部12)に結合された状態で、結合部17の取手部18を手Hで把持して、包装体1を持ち運び得る。 FIG. 6 is a schematic view showing a mode in which the package 1 according to the embodiment is completely or partially opened. As shown in FIG. 6A, in the embodiment in which the package 1 is completely opened, the first weakening line 21 and the second weakening line 22 are separated from each other on all of the plurality of side surface portions. As a result, the first cutting line 21a and the second cutting line 22a are formed on all of the plurality of side surface portions, the upper surface portion 15 is removed, and the opening OP is formed. The user can remove the absorbent article 3 from the opening OP. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 6B, in the embodiment in which the package 1 is partially opened, in a part of the plurality of side surface portions (example: front surface portion 11, right surface portion 13 and left surface portion 14), The first weakening line 21 and the second weakening line 22 are separated. As a result, the first cutting line 21a and the second cutting line 22a are formed on a part of the plurality of side surface portions (example: front surface portion 11, right surface portion 13 and left surface portion 14), and an opening OP is formed. NS. The user can remove the absorbent article 3 from the opening OP. In addition, the user grips the handle portion 18 of the joint portion 17 with the hand H in a state where the upper surface portion 15 is coupled to the other part of the plurality of side surface portions (eg, the rear surface portion 12). The package 1 can be carried.
 図7は、実施形態に係る包装体の作用効果を示す模式図である。この図は、主に角部19における第1弱め線21及び第2弱め線22での切り離しの状態を、包装体1(包装袋2)の表面に沿って示している。 FIG. 7 is a schematic diagram showing the action and effect of the package according to the embodiment. This figure mainly shows the state of separation at the first weakening line 21 and the second weakening line 22 at the corner portion 19 along the surface of the package 1 (packaging bag 2).
 本包装体1では、角部19で、第1弱め線21近傍に第2弱め線22が形成され、第2弱め線22の端部の延長線L0が第2弱め線22と隣り合う第1弱め線21と交差する。
 そのため、包装体1を完全に又は部分的に開封する態様において、図7(a)の矢印が示すように、使用者は、角部19において第2弱め線22の切り離しを行い、そのままその切り離しの力を第1弱め線21に容易に移行させ、第1弱め線21の切り離しを容易に行うことができる。すなわち、第2弱め線22の第2切断線22aを形成した後に、そのまま連続的に第1弱め線21の第1切断線21aを容易に形成できる。それにより、必要な数の第1弱め線21及び第2弱め線22の切り離しを行うことで、包装体1から、包装体の上面部15を容易に取り除くこと、及び、部分的に容易に切り離すことができる。
In the present package 1, the second weakening line 22 is formed in the vicinity of the first weakening line 21 at the corner portion 19, and the extension line L0 at the end of the second weakening line 22 is adjacent to the second weakening line 22. It intersects the weakening line 21.
Therefore, in the embodiment in which the package 1 is completely or partially opened, as shown by the arrow in FIG. 7A, the user cuts off the second weakening line 22 at the corner portion 19 and separates the second weakening line 22 as it is. The force of the first weakening line 21 can be easily transferred to the first weakening line 21, and the first weakening line 21 can be easily separated. That is, after forming the second cutting line 22a of the second weakening line 22, the first cutting line 21a of the first weakening line 21 can be easily formed continuously as it is. Thereby, by separating the required number of the first weakening wires 21 and the second weakening wires 22, the upper surface portion 15 of the packaging body can be easily removed from the packaging body 1, and the upper surface portion 15 of the packaging body can be easily separated. be able to.
 更に、本包装体1では、包装体1の全周(前面部11、後面部12、右面部13及び左面部14)に亘って設けられた複数の第1弱め線21は、連続的には設けられていない。すなわち、角部19において、隣り合う第1弱め線21同士は所定の距離d2で互いに離間している。更に、全角部19に設けられた複数の第2弱め線22は、複数の第1弱め線21のうちの隣り合う第1弱め線21とは所定の距離d1で互いに離間している。
 ここで、包装体1を部分的に開封する態様では、包装体1の上面部15を把持して持ち運ぶときに、吸収性物品3の重みで、切り離しの力が、開封のために切り離された第1弱め線から、切り離されず結合されたままの第1弱め線21に伝わることで、切り離しが起きる又は進む場合があり得る。しかし、その場合でも、本包装体1では、図7(b)に示すように、それら第1弱め線21の切り離し(第1切断線21a)は、角部19(P1及びP2のX印で示す位置)で止まり、隣り合う第2弱め線22や第1弱め線21に移行することがない。したがって、包装体1から上面部15が外れることはない。それにより、使用者は、上面部15を把持して包装体1を別の場所へ持ち運ぶことができる(持ち運びの耐久性が高くなる)。
Further, in the present package 1, a plurality of first weakening lines 21 provided over the entire circumference of the package 1 (front surface portion 11, rear surface portion 12, right surface portion 13 and left surface portion 14) are continuously provided. Not provided. That is, in the corner portion 19, the adjacent first weakening lines 21 are separated from each other at a predetermined distance d2. Further, the plurality of second weakening lines 22 provided in the full-width portion 19 are separated from each other by a predetermined distance d1 from the adjacent first weakening line 21 among the plurality of first weakening lines 21.
Here, in the embodiment in which the package 1 is partially opened, when the upper surface portion 15 of the package 1 is gripped and carried, the weight of the absorbent article 3 separates the separating force for opening. Separation may occur or proceed from the first weakening line to the first weakening line 21 which is not separated and remains connected. However, even in that case, in the present package 1, as shown in FIG. 7 (b), the separation of the first weakening line 21 (first cutting line 21a) is indicated by the X mark of the corner portion 19 (P1 and P2). It stops at the position shown) and does not shift to the adjacent second weakening line 22 or the first weakening line 21. Therefore, the upper surface portion 15 does not come off from the package 1. As a result, the user can grip the upper surface portion 15 and carry the package 1 to another place (the carrying durability is increased).
 このように、この包装体1は、様々な使用の態様に応じて、包装体1の上面部15の切り離しの度合いを調節すること、すなわち、包装体1の開封度合いの制御性と、包装体1の上面部15を完全に又は部分的に容易に切り離すこと、すなわち、包装体1の開封の容易性と、を両立させることができる。 As described above, the package 1 adjusts the degree of separation of the upper surface portion 15 of the package 1 according to various modes of use, that is, the controllability of the degree of opening of the package 1 and the package. The upper surface portion 15 of 1 can be completely or partially easily separated, that is, the ease of opening the package 1 can be achieved at the same time.
 ここで、上記の実施形態において、包装体1における第1弱め線21と第2弱め線22との関係として、0<d1<d2、かつ、延長線L0と第1弱め線21との交差が挙げられている。その関係は、言い換えると、以下のような関係であるともいえる。すなわち、第2弱め線22は、隣り合う少なくとも一つの第1弱め線21の切り離しが行われた後、上面部15が把持されて、包装体1が持ち上げられたとき、複数の吸収性物品3の重みで、第1弱め線21の切り離しが、角部19に伝搬したとしても、到達できない位置、に形成されている。以下、図8を参照して、具体的に説明する。 Here, in the above embodiment, the relationship between the first weakening line 21 and the second weakening line 22 in the package 1 is 0 <d1 <d2, and the intersection of the extension line L0 and the first weakening line 21 is present. It is listed. In other words, the relationship can be said to be as follows. That is, the second weakening line 22 has a plurality of absorbent articles 3 when the upper surface portion 15 is gripped and the package 1 is lifted after the separation of at least one adjacent first weakening line 21 is performed. Due to the weight of, the separation of the first weakening line 21 is formed at a position that cannot be reached even if it propagates to the corner portion 19. Hereinafter, a specific description will be given with reference to FIG.
 図8は、実施形態に係る包装体の作用効果を示す模式図である。この図は、一例として、右面部13、及び、右面部13と後面部12との間の角部19における、第1弱め線21での切り離しの状態を示している。ただし、分かり易さのために、右面部13の表面に、奥行方向Dに平行で、上下方向Tに間隔を空けた複数の線を記載している。それら複数の線の歪みなどの変化により右面部13の状態を立体的に表現している。 FIG. 8 is a schematic diagram showing the action and effect of the package according to the embodiment. This figure shows, as an example, a state of separation at the first weakening line 21 at the right surface portion 13 and the corner portion 19 between the right surface portion 13 and the rear surface portion 12. However, for the sake of clarity, a plurality of lines parallel to the depth direction D and spaced apart in the vertical direction T are drawn on the surface of the right surface portion 13. The state of the right surface portion 13 is three-dimensionally expressed by changes such as distortion of the plurality of lines.
 本包装体1は、例えば、図8に示すように、右面部13に、奥行方向Dに沿って延びるように形成された第1弱め線21を備え、角部19を跨ぐように形成された第2弱め線22を備えている。ここで、包装体1を部分的に開封する態様では、少なくとも前面部11及び右面部13の第1弱め線21の切り離しが行われ、第1切断線21aが形成された後で、上面部15が把持されて、包装体1が持ち上げられる。そのとき、吸収性物品3の重みで、第1切断線21aが角部19へ向かって伝搬することが起こり得る。
 その場合、第1切断線21aが、第1弱め線21の方向にそのまま伝搬すれば、図8に示す第1切断線21a0のようになる。あるいは、上面部15を上方へ持ち上げる力と、吸収性物品3の重みによる右面部13を下方へ押し下げる力との関係で、第1切断線21aが、第1弱め線21の方向よりも斜め上方に伝搬し、図8に示す第1切断線21aXのようになる。いずれの場合にも、角部19に第2弱め線22が無ければ、概ね角部19の途中で第1切断線21aの伝搬は止まり得る。しかし、その場合、弱め線が角部19にないため、上面部15を取り除きたい場合などでは、その取り外しが困難となる。
 ここで、上面部15の取り除きを容易にするために、図8に示すように、角部19における第1弱め線21の近傍に、上下方向Tに間隔を空けて、第1弱め線21と平行に奥行方向Dに延びる第2弱め線121を形成することが考えられる(特許文献1)。しかし、その場合でも、第1切断線21aXが、第2弱め線121に伝搬してしまうので、第2弱め線121の切り離しが起こり、その切り離しが更に後面部12の第1弱め線21まで伝搬するおそれがある。そうなると、結局、弱め線のすべてに切り離しが起きて、上面部15が取り除かれるおそれがある。
 そこで、本包装体1では、図8に示すように、角部19の第2弱め線22が、第1弱め線21の切り離しがその角部19に伝搬したとしても到達できない位置に形成されている。それにより、第2弱め線22の切り離しが起こることを抑制でき、第2弱め線22よりも先の第1弱め線21に切り離しが生じることを抑制できる。それにより、上面部15を把持して包装体1を別の場所へ安定的に持ち運ぶことができる。このように、この包装体1は、包装体1の開封の容易性と、包装体の開封度合いの制御性と、を両立できる。
As shown in FIG. 8, for example, the present package 1 is provided with a first weakening line 21 formed so as to extend along the depth direction D on the right surface portion 13, and is formed so as to straddle the corner portion 19. The second weakening line 22 is provided. Here, in the embodiment in which the package 1 is partially opened, at least the first weakening line 21 of the front surface portion 11 and the right surface portion 13 is separated, and after the first cutting line 21a is formed, the upper surface portion 15 is formed. Is gripped and the package 1 is lifted. At that time, the weight of the absorbent article 3 may cause the first cutting line 21a to propagate toward the corner portion 19.
In that case, if the first cutting line 21a propagates in the direction of the first weakening line 21 as it is, it becomes like the first cutting line 21a0 shown in FIG. Alternatively, the first cutting line 21a is obliquely upward from the direction of the first weakening line 21 due to the relationship between the force that lifts the upper surface portion 15 upward and the force that pushes the right surface portion 13 downward due to the weight of the absorbent article 3. It propagates to the first cutting line 21aX shown in FIG. In any case, if the corner portion 19 does not have the second weakening line 22, the propagation of the first cutting line 21a can be stopped substantially in the middle of the corner portion 19. However, in that case, since the weakening line is not provided at the corner portion 19, it is difficult to remove the upper surface portion 15 when it is desired to remove the weakening line.
Here, in order to facilitate the removal of the upper surface portion 15, as shown in FIG. 8, in the vicinity of the first weakening line 21 at the corner portion 19, the first weakening line 21 and the first weakening line 21 are spaced apart from each other in the vertical direction T. It is conceivable to form a second weakening line 121 extending in parallel in the depth direction D (Patent Document 1). However, even in that case, since the first cutting line 21aX propagates to the second weakening line 121, the second weakening line 121 is separated, and the separation further propagates to the first weakening line 21 of the rear surface portion 12. There is a risk of doing so. In that case, in the end, all the weakening lines may be separated and the upper surface portion 15 may be removed.
Therefore, in the present package 1, as shown in FIG. 8, the second weakening line 22 of the corner portion 19 is formed at a position that cannot be reached even if the disconnection of the first weakening line 21 propagates to the corner portion 19. There is. As a result, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of disconnection of the second weakening line 22, and it is possible to suppress the occurrence of disconnection of the first weakening line 21 ahead of the second weakening line 22. As a result, the upper surface portion 15 can be gripped and the package 1 can be stably carried to another place. As described above, the package 1 can achieve both the ease of opening the package 1 and the controllability of the degree of opening of the package 1.
 図9は、実施形態に係る第1弱め線及び第2弱め線の構成例を示す模式図である。具体的には、角部19及びその近傍における第1弱め線21と第2弱め線22との位置関係を、包装体1(包装袋2)の表面に沿って示す模式図である。本実施形態では、第2弱め線22の少なくとも端部は、隣り合う前記第1弱め線21と、上下方向Tにおいて重なっていてもよい。すなわち、隣り合う第2弱め線22と前記第1弱め線21とは、上下方向Tにおいて長さdL(>0)だけ重複していてもよい。それにより、使用者が、包装体1を開封しようとして、第2弱め線22の切り離しを行ったとき、その切り離しの方向が、第2弱め線22の端部の延長線L0から逸れたとしても、その切り離しを確実に第1弱め線21に伝搬させることができる。すなわち、第2弱め線22の切り離しの力を第1弱め線21に確実に移行でき、その第1の弱め21線の切り離しをより容易に行うことができる。したがって、包装体を容易に開封できる。
 dLは、第2弱め線22の切り離しを確実に第1弱め線21に伝搬させる観点から0.1cm以上が好ましく、0.5cm以上がより好ましい。dLは、隣り合う第1弱め線21同士を十分に離間させる観点から4cm以下が好ましく、3cm以下がより好ましい。
FIG. 9 is a schematic diagram showing a configuration example of the first weakening line and the second weakening line according to the embodiment. Specifically, it is a schematic diagram which shows the positional relationship between the 1st weakening line 21 and the 2nd weakening line 22 in a corner portion 19 and its vicinity along the surface of a package 1 (packaging bag 2). In the present embodiment, at least the end of the second weakening line 22 may overlap with the adjacent first weakening line 21 in the vertical direction T. That is, the adjacent second weakening line 22 and the first weakening line 21 may overlap by the length dL (> 0) in the vertical direction T. As a result, when the user tries to open the package 1 and disconnects the second weakening wire 22, even if the disconnection direction deviates from the extension line L0 at the end of the second weakening wire 22. , The disconnection can be reliably propagated to the first weakening line 21. That is, the disconnection force of the second weakening line 22 can be reliably transferred to the first weakening line 21, and the first weakening line 21 can be separated more easily. Therefore, the package can be easily opened.
The dL is preferably 0.1 cm or more, and more preferably 0.5 cm or more, from the viewpoint of reliably propagating the disconnection of the second weakening line 22 to the first weakening line 21. The dL is preferably 4 cm or less, and more preferably 3 cm or less, from the viewpoint of sufficiently separating the adjacent first weakening lines 21 from each other.
 また、本実施形態では、図9に示すように、第2弱め線22の少なくとも端部の延長線L0は、隣り合う第1弱め線21に対して鋭角に交差してもよい。すなわち、延長線L0と第1弱め線21との成す角をαとすると、(0<)α<90°でもよい。それにより、使用者が、包装体1を開封しようとして、第2弱め線22の切り離しを行ったとき、その切り離しの力を、第2弱め線22の第1弱め線21に対する鋭角な傾き(角α)に沿って、第2弱め線22から第1弱め線21へ滑らかに移行させることができる。したがって、両弱め線の切り離しをより容易に行うことができ、包装体1を容易に開封できる。
 ここで、αは、第2弱め線22の切り離しを確実に第1弱め線21に伝搬させる観点から15°以上が好ましく、30°以上がより好ましい。また、αは、第2弱め線22の切り離しを滑らかに第1弱め線21に伝搬させる観点から80°以下が好ましく、70°以下がより好ましい。
Further, in the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 9, the extension line L0 at least at the end of the second weakening line 22 may intersect the adjacent first weakening line 21 at an acute angle. That is, if the angle formed by the extension line L0 and the first weakening line 21 is α, (0 <) α <90 ° may be used. As a result, when the user tries to open the package 1 and separates the second weakening line 22, the force of the disconnection is applied to the sharp inclination (angle) of the second weakening line 22 with respect to the first weakening line 21. Along α), the second weakening line 22 can be smoothly transitioned to the first weakening line 21. Therefore, both weakening lines can be separated more easily, and the package 1 can be easily opened.
Here, α is preferably 15 ° or more, and more preferably 30 ° or more, from the viewpoint of reliably propagating the disconnection of the second weakening line 22 to the first weakening line 21. Further, α is preferably 80 ° or less, more preferably 70 ° or less, from the viewpoint of smoothly propagating the disconnection of the second weakening line 22 to the first weakening line 21.
 また、本実施形態では、図9に示すように、第1弱め線21が、間欠的に配置された複数の弱め部分21wと、隣り合う弱め部分21w間に位置する複数の非弱め部分21vとで構成されていてもよい。その場合、本実施形態では、隣り合う第1弱め線21と第2弱め線22との距離d1は、第1弱め線21を構成する弱め部分21w同士の距離よりも長くてもよい。すなわち、弱め部分21w同士の距離をd21とすると、d21<d1でもよい。それにより、包装体1を部分的に開封する態様では、上面部15を把持して包装体1を持ち運ぶとき、吸収性物品3の重みがあっても、第1弱め線21の切り離しは、第2弱め線22に伝搬し難く、角部19で止まり易くなる。それにより、上面部15を把持して包装体1を安定的に持ち運ぶことができる(持ち運びの耐久性が高くなる)。 Further, in the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 9, the first weakening line 21 is a plurality of weakening portions 21w arranged intermittently and a plurality of non-weakening portions 21v located between the adjacent weakening portions 21w. It may be composed of. In that case, in the present embodiment, the distance d1 between the adjacent first weakening line 21 and the second weakening line 22 may be longer than the distance between the weakening portions 21w constituting the first weakening line 21. That is, if the distance between the weakened portions 21w is d21, d21 <d1 may be used. As a result, in the embodiment in which the package 1 is partially opened, when the upper surface portion 15 is gripped and the package 1 is carried, even if the absorbent article 3 is heavy, the first weakening line 21 is separated. 2 It is difficult to propagate to the weakening line 22, and it is easy to stop at the corner portion 19. As a result, the upper surface portion 15 can be gripped and the package 1 can be stably carried (the carrying durability is increased).
 図10は、実施形態に係る第1弱め線及び第2弱め線の構成例を示す模式図である。具体的には、角部19及びその近傍における第1弱め線21と第2弱め線22との位置関係を、包装体1(包装袋2)の表面に沿って示す模式図である。(a)~(d)は、第2弱め線22が第1弱め線21よりも上下方向Tの上側に位置する場合での構成のバリエーションを示し、(e)~(f)は、第2弱め線22が第1弱め線21よりも上下方向Tの下側に位置する場合での構成のバリエーションを示している。 FIG. 10 is a schematic diagram showing a configuration example of the first weakening line and the second weakening line according to the embodiment. Specifically, it is a schematic diagram which shows the positional relationship between the 1st weakening line 21 and the 2nd weakening line 22 in a corner portion 19 and its vicinity along the surface of a package 1 (packaging bag 2). (A) to (d) show variations in the configuration when the second weakening line 22 is located above the first weakening line 21 in the vertical direction T, and (e) to (f) are the second. It shows a variation of the configuration when the weakening line 22 is located below the first weakening line 21 in the vertical direction T.
 本実施形態では、図10に示すように、第2弱め線22は、第2弱め線22における包装体1(包装袋2)の表面に沿った方向の中央部22pを頂点とする、上下方向Tの上側に凸の形状((a)~(d))又は下側に凸の形状((e)~(h))を有していてもよい。この場合、第2弱め線22において、隣り合う第1弱め線21側の部分が、第1弱め線21に漸近する形状を有している。そのため、使用者が、包装体1を開封しようとして、第2弱め線22の切り離しを行ったとき、その切り離しの力を、第2弱め線22の第1弱め線21側の部分に沿って、第2弱め線22から第1弱め線21へより滑らかに移行させることができる。それにより、両弱め線における切り離しをより容易に行うことができ、包装体をより容易に開封することができる。 In the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 10, the second weakening line 22 is in the vertical direction with the central portion 22p in the direction along the surface of the package 1 (packaging bag 2) in the second weakening line 22 as the apex. It may have a convex shape ((a) to (d)) on the upper side of the T or a convex shape ((e) to (h)) on the lower side. In this case, in the second weakening line 22, the portion on the side of the adjacent first weakening line 21 has a shape that asymptotes to the first weakening line 21. Therefore, when the user tries to open the package 1 and separates the second weakening line 22, the force of the disconnection is applied along the portion of the second weakening line 22 on the first weakening line 21 side. The transition from the second weakening line 22 to the first weakening line 21 can be made more smoothly. Thereby, the separation at both weakening lines can be performed more easily, and the package can be opened more easily.
 ただし、(a)、(e)の第2弱め線22はアーチ型であり、(b)、(f)の第2弱め線22は(丸みを帯びた)三角形型であり、(c)、(g)の第2弱め線22は(丸みを帯びた)三角形型であるが、第2弱め線22と第1弱め線21とが上下方向Tには重なっていない。(d)、(h)の第2弱め線22は矩形型である。ただし、アーチ型や矩形型の場合でも、第2弱め線22と第1弱め線21とが上下方向Tには重なっていなくてもよい。また、第2弱め線22の形状はこの例に限定されるものではなく、他の形状であってもよく、半円形型、半楕円形型、台形型などであってもよい。また、各第2弱め線22は、境界線CLに対して線対称であってもよい。その場合、境界線CL付近を指で摘まんで第2弱め線22の切り離しを行うとき、境界線CLを挟んだ両側の側面部の各々の第2弱め線22を同時に一緒に破断することができる。 However, the second weakening line 22 of (a) and (e) is arch-shaped, and the second weakening line 22 of (b) and (f) is a (rounded) triangular shape, and (c), The second weakening line 22 of (g) has a (rounded) triangular shape, but the second weakening line 22 and the first weakening line 21 do not overlap in the vertical direction T. The second weakening line 22 of (d) and (h) is rectangular. However, even in the case of the arch type or the rectangular type, the second weakening line 22 and the first weakening line 21 do not have to overlap in the vertical direction T. Further, the shape of the second weakening line 22 is not limited to this example, and may be another shape, a semicircular shape, a semi-elliptical shape, a trapezoidal shape, or the like. Further, each second weakening line 22 may be line-symmetrical with respect to the boundary line CL. In that case, when the vicinity of the boundary line CL is pinched with a finger to separate the second weakening line 22, the second weakening lines 22 on both side surfaces sandwiching the boundary line CL can be broken together at the same time. ..
 また、第2弱め線22は、アーチ型、よって、略円弧の形状を有していることが好ましい((a)、(e))。それにより、包装体1を部分的に開封する態様において、上面部15を把持して包装体1を持ち運ぼうとしたとき、吸収性物品3の重みで、第1弱め線21の切り離しが隣り合う第2弱め線22へ伝搬したとしても、切り離しの力が、第2弱め線22の各部分での接線方向に分散され、第2弱め線22の切り離しが進行し難くなる。それにより、上面部15を把持して包装体1を安定的に持ち運ぶことができる(持ち運びの耐久性が高くなる)。 Further, it is preferable that the second weakening line 22 has an arch shape and thus has a substantially arc shape ((a), (e)). As a result, in the embodiment in which the package 1 is partially opened, when the upper surface portion 15 is gripped and the package 1 is to be carried, the weight of the absorbent article 3 causes the first weakening lines 21 to be separated from each other adjacent to each other. Even if it propagates to the 2 weakening line 22, the disconnecting force is dispersed in the tangential direction at each portion of the 2nd weakening line 22, and the disconnection of the 2nd weakening line 22 becomes difficult to proceed. As a result, the upper surface portion 15 can be gripped and the package 1 can be stably carried (the carrying durability is increased).
 また、本実施形態では、図1~図4に示すように、第1弱め線21は、上下方向Tにおける複数の吸収性物品3の上側の端縁3TE1と同じ位置又は端縁3TE1よりも上側の位置に形成さていてもよい。その場合、第2弱め線22は、第1弱め線21よりも上下方向Tの上側の位置に形成されている。そのため、第2弱め線22の位置が、包装体1の吸収性物品3の位置と重なることがない。したがって、包装体1が、吸収性物品3で膨れた状態であっても、使用者は、その膨れた部分に影響されることなく、例えば、第2弱め線22の近傍を容易に摘まんで、第2弱め線22の切り離しを容易に行うことができる。すなわち、包装体1を容易に開封することができる。 Further, in the present embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 1 to 4, the first weakening line 21 is at the same position as the upper edge 3TE1 of the plurality of absorbent articles 3 in the vertical direction T or above the edge 3TE1. It may be formed at the position of. In that case, the second weakening line 22 is formed at a position above the first weakening line 21 in the vertical direction T. Therefore, the position of the second weakening line 22 does not overlap with the position of the absorbent article 3 of the package 1. Therefore, even if the package 1 is inflated by the absorbent article 3, the user can easily pick the vicinity of the second weakening line 22, for example, without being affected by the inflated portion. The second weakening line 22 can be easily separated. That is, the package 1 can be easily opened.
 また、本実施形態では、図1~図4に示すように、前面部11、後面部12、右面部13、及び左面部14の各々における上下方向Tの上側の部分、例えば、上面部15、又は、上面部15の上部、に設けられた取手部18を更に備えてもよい。それにより、包装体1を部分的に開封する態様において、上面部15を取手部18で把持して包装体1を容易に持ち運ぶことができる。ここで、このような包装体1を持ち運ぶとき、吸収性物品3の重みで、上面部15における外周の残りの部分が切り離されて、上面部15が包装体1から分離してしまうそれがある。しかし、この包装体1は、上記したような構成を有しているので、部分的に結合されている上面部15が分離する事態を生じさせることはない。 Further, in the present embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 1 to 4, the upper portion in the vertical direction T in each of the front surface portion 11, the rear surface portion 12, the right surface portion 13, and the left surface portion 14, for example, the upper surface portion 15. Alternatively, a handle portion 18 provided on the upper portion of the upper surface portion 15 may be further provided. Thereby, in the embodiment of partially opening the package 1, the upper surface portion 15 can be gripped by the handle portion 18 and the package 1 can be easily carried. Here, when carrying such a package 1, the weight of the absorbent article 3 may cause the remaining portion of the outer periphery of the upper surface portion 15 to be separated, and the upper surface portion 15 may be separated from the package body 1. .. However, since the package 1 has the above-mentioned structure, the partially bonded upper surface portion 15 does not separate.
 次に、実施形態に係る包装体1の製造方法について説明する。
 図11は、実施形態に係る包装体の製造方法の一例を示す模式図である。この製造方法では、例として、ガゼットタイプの包装体1の製造方法について説明することとする。ただし、本製造方法は、各工程における資材の搬送等において、互いに直交する搬送方向MD、横断方向CD及び厚さ方向TD(図示されず)を有する。
Next, a method for manufacturing the package 1 according to the embodiment will be described.
FIG. 11 is a schematic view showing an example of a method for manufacturing a package according to an embodiment. In this manufacturing method, as an example, a manufacturing method of the gusset type package 1 will be described. However, this manufacturing method has a transport direction MD, a transverse direction CD, and a thickness direction TD (not shown) that are orthogonal to each other in the transport of materials in each step.
 まず、複数の吸収性物品3を収納可能な包装袋2を形成する。包装袋2の形成方法は、側面形成工程と、弱め線形成工程と、を備えている。 First, a packaging bag 2 capable of storing a plurality of absorbent articles 3 is formed. The method for forming the packaging bag 2 includes a side surface forming step and a weakening line forming step.
 側面形成工程は、搬送方向MDに沿って延びる筒状の樹脂性のシート部材50(図11(a))における、横断方向CDの両側を、それぞれ横断方向CDの内側に向かって谷折りで折り畳む。それにより、側面形成工程は、厚さ方向TDの一方側及び他方側にそれぞれ位置する前面部11及び後面部12と、前面部11と後面部12との間に折り畳まれ、横断方向CDの右側及び左側にそれぞれ位置する右面部13及び左面部14と、を形成する(図11(b))。このとき、前面部11と後面部12とが厚さ方向TDに重なり、かつ、前面部11及び後面部12の右側の部分と右面部13とが厚さ方向TDに重なり、かつ、前面部11及び後面部12の左側の部分と左面部14とが厚さ方向TDに重なる。 In the side surface forming step, both sides of the transverse CD in the tubular resin sheet member 50 (FIG. 11 (a)) extending along the transport direction MD are folded in a valley fold toward the inside of the transverse CD. .. As a result, the side surface forming step is folded between the front surface portion 11 and the rear surface portion 12 located on one side and the other side of the thickness direction TD, respectively, and the front surface portion 11 and the rear surface portion 12, and is folded on the right side of the transverse direction CD. And the right side portion 13 and the left side portion 14 located on the left side, respectively (FIG. 11 (b)). At this time, the front surface portion 11 and the rear surface portion 12 overlap in the thickness direction TD, and the right side portion and the right surface portion 13 of the front surface portion 11 and the rear surface portion 12 overlap in the thickness direction TD, and the front surface portion 11 The left side portion of the rear surface portion 12 and the left surface portion 14 overlap with each other in the thickness direction TD.
 弱め線形成工程は、前面部11及び後面部12のうちの一方側から他方側に向かって(厚さ方向TDに)弱め線形成刃(図示されず)を押し付ける。例えば、折り畳まれたシート部材50を、弱め線形成刃を有するロールとアンビルロールとに挟持させる。それにより、弱め線形成工程は、前面部11及び後面部12に、横断方向CDに沿って延びる第1弱め線21及び第2弱め線22を形成する。それに伴い、同時に、前面部11と後面部12との間に位置し、厚さ方向TDに重なった右面部13及び左面部14に、横断方向CDに沿って延びる第1弱め線21及び第2弱め線22が形成される。このとき、第1弱め線21及び第2弱め線22は、第1弱め線21と第2弱め線22との関係が、上記0<d1<d2、かつ、延長線L0と第1弱め線21との交差、を満足するように形成される。なお、第2弱め線22は、隣り合う少なくとも一つの第1弱め線21の切り離しが行われた後、上面部15が把持され、包装体1が持ち上げられたとき、複数の吸収性物品3の重みで、第1弱め線21の切り離しが、角部19に伝搬したとしても、到達できない位置、に形成されてもよい。 In the weakening line forming step, the weakening line forming blade (not shown) is pressed from one side of the front surface portion 11 and the rear surface portion 12 toward the other side (in the thickness direction TD). For example, the folded sheet member 50 is sandwiched between a roll having a weakening line forming blade and an anvil roll. As a result, the weakening line forming step forms the first weakening line 21 and the second weakening line 22 extending along the transverse direction CD on the front surface portion 11 and the rear surface portion 12. Along with this, at the same time, the first weakening line 21 and the second weakening line 21 and the second weakening line 21 extending along the transverse direction CD are located between the front surface portion 11 and the rear surface portion 12 and overlap the right surface portion 13 and the left surface portion 14 in the thickness direction TD. The weakening line 22 is formed. At this time, in the first weakening line 21 and the second weakening line 22, the relationship between the first weakening line 21 and the second weakening line 22 is 0 <d1 <d2, and the extension line L0 and the first weakening line 21. It is formed to satisfy the intersection with. It should be noted that the second weakening line 22 has a plurality of absorbent articles 3 when the upper surface portion 15 is gripped and the package 1 is lifted after the separation of at least one adjacent first weakening line 21 is performed. Due to the weight, the cutoff of the first weakening line 21 may be formed at a position where it cannot be reached even if it propagates to the corner portion 19.
 形成する包装袋2が開封部20を備える場合には、弱め線形成工程は、更に、前面部11及び後面部12のうちの一方側から他方側に向かって(厚さ方向TDに)別の弱め線形成刃(図示されず)を押し付ける。例えば、折り畳まれ、第1弱め線21及び第2弱め線22が形成されたシート部材50を、別の弱め線形成刃を有するロールとアンビルロールとに挟持させる。それにより、弱め線形成工程は、前面部11及び後面部12に、搬送方向MDに延びる二本の縦弱め線25及び横断方向CDに延びる横弱め線24を形成する。それに伴い、同時に、弱め線形成工程は、前面部11と後面部12との間に位置し、厚さ方向TDに重なった右面部13及び左面部14に、搬送方向MDに延びる二本の縦弱め線25及び横断方向CDに延びる横弱め線24が形成される。ここで、二本の縦弱め線25における搬送方向MDの下端の位置が、包装袋2に複数の吸収性物品3が収納されているとき、複数の吸収性物品3における搬送方向MDに平行な上下方向Tの下端の位置よりも高く、複数の吸収性物品3における上下方向Tの中間の位置よりも低くなるよう、二本の縦弱め線25及び横弱め線24が形成されてもよい。 When the packaging bag 2 to be formed includes the opening portion 20, the weakening line forming step is further separated from one side of the front surface portion 11 and the rear surface portion 12 toward the other side (in the thickness direction TD). Press the weak line forming blade (not shown). For example, the sheet member 50 that has been folded and formed with the first weakening wire 21 and the second weakening wire 22 is sandwiched between a roll having another weakening wire forming blade and an anvil roll. As a result, in the weakening line forming step, two vertical weakening lines 25 extending in the transport direction MD and a horizontal weakening line 24 extending in the transverse direction CD are formed on the front surface portion 11 and the rear surface portion 12. Along with this, at the same time, the weakening line forming step is located between the front surface portion 11 and the rear surface portion 12, and has two vertical lines extending in the transport direction MD on the right surface portion 13 and the left surface portion 14 overlapping the thickness direction TD. The weakening line 25 and the lateral weakening line 24 extending in the transverse direction CD are formed. Here, the position of the lower end of the transport direction MD on the two vertical weakening lines 25 is parallel to the transport direction MD in the plurality of absorbent articles 3 when the packaging bag 2 contains the plurality of absorbent articles 3. Two vertical weakening lines 25 and horizontal weakening lines 24 may be formed so as to be higher than the position of the lower end of the vertical direction T and lower than the position in the middle of the vertical direction T in the plurality of absorbent articles 3.
 ただし、その場合、第1弱め線21及び第2弱め線22を形成する工程と、二本の縦弱め線25及び横弱め線24を形成する工程とは、どちらを先に行ってもよいし、同時に行ってもよい。同時に行う場合には、例えば、折り畳まれたシート部材50を、弱め線形成刃と別の弱め線形成刃とを有する一つのロールとアンビルロールとで挟持する。なお、同時に、取手部18を形成してもよい。以上のようにして、包装袋2が形成される(図11(c))。 However, in that case, either the step of forming the first weakening line 21 and the second weakening line 22 or the step of forming the two vertical weakening lines 25 and the horizontal weakening line 24 may be performed first. , May be done at the same time. When performed at the same time, for example, the folded sheet member 50 is sandwiched between one roll having a weakening line forming blade and another weakening line forming blade and an anvil roll. At the same time, the handle portion 18 may be formed. As described above, the packaging bag 2 is formed (FIG. 11 (c)).
 このとき図11(c)の包装袋2を後面部12と左面部14との境界線CLで切断して展開すると図4のようになる。ここで、右面部13と前面部11との境界線CLを含む領域STAについて考える。ただし、領域STAは、包装袋2の表面に沿う底面部16に平行な方向(幅方向W及び奥行方向D)の幅が、右面部13の幅と同じであり、包装袋2の表面に沿う底面部16に平行な方向(幅方向W及び奥行方向D)の中心が、右面部13と前面部11との境界線CLである矩形領域である。このとき、領域STAにおいて、境界線CLを跨ぐ第2弱め線は、境界線CLに対して線対称である。更に、境界線CLの両側に隣り合う前面部11の第1弱め線、横弱め線及び縦弱め線と、右面部13の第1弱め線、横弱め線及び縦弱め線とは、境界線CLに対して線対称である。他の境界線CLを含む領域STA(図示されず)においても同様である。例えば、右面部13と後面部12との境界線CLを含む領域STAでは、その幅は右面部13の幅と同じであり、境界線CLを跨ぐ第2弱め線、隣り合う後面部12及び右面部13の第1弱め線、横弱め線及び縦弱め線は、境界線CLに対して線対称である。また、左面部14と前面部11との境界線CLを含む領域STAでは、その幅は左面部14の幅と同じであり、境界線CLを跨ぐ第2弱め線、隣り合う前面部11及び左面部14の第1弱め線、横弱め線及び縦弱め線は、境界線CLに対して線対称である。また、左面部14と後面部12との境界線CLを含む領域STAでは、その幅は左面部14の幅と同じであり、境界線CLを跨ぐ第2弱め線、隣り合う後面部12及び左面部14の第1弱め線、横弱め線及び縦弱め線は、境界線CLに対して線対称である。 At this time, when the packaging bag 2 of FIG. 11C is cut at the boundary line CL between the rear surface portion 12 and the left surface portion 14 and unfolded, the result is as shown in FIG. Here, consider the region STA including the boundary line CL between the right surface portion 13 and the front surface portion 11. However, in the region STA, the width in the direction parallel to the bottom surface portion 16 along the surface of the packaging bag 2 (width direction W and depth direction D) is the same as the width of the right surface portion 13, and is along the surface of the packaging bag 2. The center in the direction parallel to the bottom surface portion 16 (width direction W and depth direction D) is a rectangular region which is a boundary line CL between the right surface portion 13 and the front surface portion 11. At this time, in the region STA, the second weakening line straddling the boundary line CL is axisymmetric with respect to the boundary line CL. Further, the first weakening line, the horizontal weakening line and the vertical weakening line of the front surface portion 11 adjacent to both sides of the boundary line CL and the first weakening line, the horizontal weakening line and the vertical weakening line of the right surface portion 13 are the boundary line CL. It is line symmetric with respect to. The same applies to the region STA (not shown) including the other boundary line CL. For example, in the region STA including the boundary line CL between the right surface portion 13 and the rear surface portion 12, the width thereof is the same as the width of the right surface portion 13, and the second weakening line straddling the boundary line CL, the adjacent rear surface portions 12 and the right. The first weakening line, the horizontal weakening line, and the vertical weakening line of the face portion 13 are line-symmetrical with respect to the boundary line CL. Further, in the region STA including the boundary line CL between the left surface portion 14 and the front surface portion 11, the width thereof is the same as the width of the left surface portion 14, and the second weakening line straddling the boundary line CL, the adjacent front surface portions 11 and the left The first weakening line, the horizontal weakening line, and the vertical weakening line of the face portion 14 are line-symmetrical with respect to the boundary line CL. Further, in the region STA including the boundary line CL between the left surface portion 14 and the rear surface portion 12, the width thereof is the same as the width of the left surface portion 14, and the second weakening line straddling the boundary line CL, the adjacent rear surface portions 12 and the left The first weakening line, the horizontal weakening line, and the vertical weakening line of the face portion 14 are line-symmetrical with respect to the boundary line CL.
 その後、形成された包装袋2における底面側の部分を熱融着で封止して底面部16を形成する。次いで、包装袋2における上面側から複数の吸収性物品3を収納する。最後に、包装袋2における上面側の部分を熱融着で封止して結合部17を形成する。以上のようにして、ガゼットタイプの包装体1が形成される。 After that, the bottom surface side portion of the formed packaging bag 2 is sealed by heat fusion to form the bottom surface portion 16. Next, a plurality of absorbent articles 3 are stored from the upper surface side of the packaging bag 2. Finally, the upper surface side portion of the packaging bag 2 is sealed by heat fusion to form the joint portion 17. As described above, the gusset type package 1 is formed.
 本実施形態では、図1~図4(、図11)に示すように、包装体1がガゼットタイプであってもよい。その場合、右面部13及び左面部14は、それぞれ前面部11及び後面部12との間における、幅方向Wの右側及び左側に谷折りに折り畳まれた部分である。そのとき、右面部13と前面部11との角部19の第2弱め線22は、右面部13と前面部11との境界線CLに対して線対称な形状を有してもよい。同様に、右面部13と後面部12との角部19の第2弱め線22は、右面部13と後面部12との境界線CLに対して線対称な形状を有してもよい。左面部14と前面部11との角部19の第2弱め線22は、左面部14と前面部11との境界線CLに対して線対称な形状を有してもよい。左面部14と後面部12との角部19の第2弱め線22は、左面部14と後面部12との境界線CLに対して線対称な形状を有してもよい。それにより、右面部13及び左面部14の各々と前面部11及び後面部12の各々との角部19から、第2弱め線22の切り離しを行うことで、右面部13及び左面部14の各々の第2弱め線22と前面部11及び後面部12の各々の第2弱め線22とを同時に一緒に破断できる。それにより、両第2弱め線の切り離しをより容易に行うことができ、全体として包装体1をより容易に開封できる。 In the present embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 1 to 4 (, FIG. 11), the package 1 may be a gusset type. In that case, the right surface portion 13 and the left surface portion 14 are portions folded in a valley fold on the right side and the left side in the width direction W between the front surface portion 11 and the rear surface portion 12, respectively. At that time, the second weakening line 22 of the corner portion 19 between the right surface portion 13 and the front surface portion 11 may have a shape symmetrical with respect to the boundary line CL between the right surface portion 13 and the front surface portion 11. Similarly, the second weakening line 22 of the corner portion 19 between the right surface portion 13 and the rear surface portion 12 may have a shape symmetrical with respect to the boundary line CL between the right surface portion 13 and the rear surface portion 12. The second weakening line 22 of the corner portion 19 between the left surface portion 14 and the front surface portion 11 may have a shape symmetrical with respect to the boundary line CL between the left surface portion 14 and the front surface portion 11. The second weakening line 22 of the corner portion 19 between the left surface portion 14 and the rear surface portion 12 may have a shape symmetrical with respect to the boundary line CL between the left surface portion 14 and the rear surface portion 12. As a result, the second weakening line 22 is separated from the corners 19 of each of the right surface portion 13 and the left surface portion 14 and each of the front surface portion 11 and the rear surface portion 12, so that each of the right surface portion 13 and the left surface portion 14 is separated. The second weakening line 22 of the above and the second weakening line 22 of each of the front surface portion 11 and the rear surface portion 12 can be broken together at the same time. As a result, both second weakening lines can be separated more easily, and the package 1 as a whole can be opened more easily.
 本実施形態では、図1~図4(、図11)に示すように、包装体1がガゼットタイプであってもよい。その場合、第1弱め線21は、上下方向Tにおける包装体1に収納された複数の吸収性物品3の上側の端縁3TE1と同じ位置又は端縁3TE1とよりも上側の位置に形成されていてもよい。その場合、第2弱め線22は、第1弱め線21よりも上下方向Tの上側に位置している。そのため、包装体1における第2弱め線22の位置が、収納された吸収性物品3の位置と重なることがない。したがって、包装体1が、収納された吸収性物品3で膨れた状態であっても、使用者は、その膨れた部分に影響されることなく、例えば、第2弱め線22の近傍を容易に摘まんで、第2弱め線22の切り離しを容易に行うことができる。すなわち、包装体を容易に開封することができる。 In the present embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 1 to 4 (, FIG. 11), the package 1 may be a gusset type. In that case, the first weakening line 21 is formed at the same position as the upper edge 3TE1 of the plurality of absorbent articles 3 housed in the package 1 in the vertical direction T or at a position higher than the edge 3TE1. You may. In that case, the second weakening line 22 is located above the first weakening line 21 in the vertical direction T. Therefore, the position of the second weakening line 22 in the package 1 does not overlap with the position of the stored absorbent article 3. Therefore, even if the package 1 is inflated by the stored absorbent article 3, the user can easily, for example, in the vicinity of the second weakening line 22 without being affected by the inflated portion. By picking it up, the second weakening line 22 can be easily separated. That is, the package can be easily opened.
 [第2実施形態]
 次に、第2実施形態について説明する。本実施形態では、包装体1(包装袋2)が複数の側面部の少なくとも一つに開封部20を備えている。以下、第1実施形態との相違点について主に説明する。
[Second Embodiment]
Next, the second embodiment will be described. In the present embodiment, the package 1 (packaging bag 2) includes an opening portion 20 on at least one of the plurality of side surface portions. Hereinafter, the differences from the first embodiment will be mainly described.
 包装体1(包装袋2)は、複数の側面部の少なくとも一つに開封部20を備えている。図1~図4に示すように、開封部20は、上下方向Tに沿って延び、幅方向W又は奥行方向Dに間隔を空けて並んだ二本の縦弱め線25と、幅方向W又は奥行方向Dに沿って延び、二本の縦弱め線25における上下方向Tの上側の端部同士をつなぐ横弱め線24とを含んでいる。ここで、縦弱め線25及び横弱め線24のような弱め線とは、包装袋2のシート部材をその厚さ方向に貫通した部分又は厚さ方向に薄く削ってハーフカットした部分(以下、「弱め部分」ともいう。)が所定の方向に間欠的に複数個並んだものをいい、ミシン目に例示される。弱め線を挟んで両側の部分を、互いに引き離すように引っ張ることで、弱め線に沿って互いに容易に切り離すことができる。そして、横弱め線24及び二本の縦弱め線25の切り離しを行うことで、開封部20を開口して、吸収性物品3を取り出すことができる。 The packaging body 1 (packaging bag 2) is provided with an opening portion 20 on at least one of a plurality of side surface portions. As shown in FIGS. 1 to 4, the opening portion 20 extends along the vertical direction T, and has two vertical weakening lines 25 arranged at intervals in the width direction W or the depth direction D, and the width direction W or. It includes a horizontal weakening line 24 extending along the depth direction D and connecting the upper ends of the vertical weakening lines 25 in the vertical direction T to each other. Here, the weakening lines such as the vertical weakening line 25 and the horizontal weakening line 24 are a portion through which the sheet member of the packaging bag 2 is penetrated in the thickness direction or a portion thinly cut in the thickness direction and half-cut (hereinafter referred to as a half-cut portion). A plurality of "weakened parts") are intermittently arranged in a predetermined direction, and are exemplified by perforations. By pulling the portions on both sides of the weakening line so as to separate them from each other, they can be easily separated from each other along the weakening line. Then, by separating the horizontal weakening line 24 and the two vertical weakening lines 25, the opening portion 20 can be opened and the absorbent article 3 can be taken out.
 本実施形態では、前面部11、後面部12、右面部13及び左面部14の各々に開封部20を含んでいる。そして、前面部11及び後面部12の各々は、上下方向Tに沿って延び、幅方向Wに間隔を空けて並んだ二本の縦弱め線25と、幅方向Wに沿って延び、二本の縦弱め線25における上下方向Tの上側の端部同士をつなぐ横弱め線24とを含んでいる。一方、右面部13及び左面部14の各々は、上下方向Tに沿って延び、奥行方向Dに間隔を空けて並んだ二本の縦弱め線25と、奥行方向Dに沿って延び、二本の縦弱め線25における上下方向Tの上側の端部同士をつなぐ横弱め線24とを含んでいる。 In the present embodiment, the opening portion 20 is included in each of the front surface portion 11, the rear surface portion 12, the right surface portion 13, and the left surface portion 14. Each of the front surface portion 11 and the rear surface portion 12 extends along the vertical direction T, two vertical weakening lines 25 arranged at intervals in the width direction W, and two extending along the width direction W. Includes a horizontal weakening line 24 that connects the upper ends of the vertical weakening line 25 in the vertical direction T. On the other hand, each of the right surface portion 13 and the left surface portion 14 extends along the vertical direction T, two vertical weakening lines 25 arranged at intervals in the depth direction D, and two extending along the depth direction D. Includes a horizontal weakening line 24 that connects the upper ends of the vertical weakening line 25 in the vertical direction T.
 開封部20において、二本の縦弱め線25における上下方向Tの下端の位置H1D、H2Dは、複数の吸収性物品3における上下方向Tの下端3TE2の位置HADよりも高く、複数の吸収性物品3における上下方向Tの中間の位置HAMよりも低い。したがって、開封部20が開封されると、吸収性物品3における上下方向Tの下側の部分は包装袋2に覆われたままとなり、その側の部分よりも上側の部分(半分以上の部分)は露出されることになる。 In the opening portion 20, the positions H1D and H2D of the lower end of the vertical direction T on the two vertical weakening lines 25 are higher than the position HAD of the lower end 3TE2 of the vertical direction T in the plurality of absorbent articles 3, and the plurality of absorbent articles It is lower than the position HAM in the middle of the vertical direction T in 3. Therefore, when the opened portion 20 is opened, the lower portion of the absorbent article 3 in the vertical direction T remains covered with the packaging bag 2, and the portion above the side portion (half or more portion). Will be exposed.
 例えば、図2に示すように、前面部11の二本の縦弱め線25における上下方向Tの下端の位置H1Dは、複数の吸収性物品3における上下方向Tの下端3TE2の位置HADよりも高く、複数の吸収性物品3における上下方向Tの中間の位置HAMよりも低い。ここで、縦弱め線25の下端の位置H1Dと、吸収性物品3の下端3TE2の位置HADとの距離をd11(>0)とし、吸収性物品3の下端3TE2の位置HADと、上端3TE1の位置HAUとの距離をdA0(>0)とすると、d11<dA0/2である。後面部12についても同様である。更に、本実施形態では、図3に示すように、右面部13の二本の縦弱め線25における上下方向Tの下端の位置H2Dは、複数の吸収性物品3における上下方向Tの下端3TE2の位置HADよりも高く、複数の吸収性物品3における上下方向Tの中間の位置HAMよりも低い。ここで、縦弱め線25の下端の位置H2Dと、吸収性物品3の下端3TE2の位置HADとの距離をd21(>0)とすると、d21<dA0/2である。左面部14についても同様である。ただし、本実施形態では、図2及び図3に示すように、上下方向Tに複数段に重ねられた複数の吸収性物品3のうち、最上段の複数の吸収性物品3に対して、開封部20が形成されている。 For example, as shown in FIG. 2, the position H1D of the lower end of the vertical direction T on the two vertical weakening lines 25 of the front surface portion 11 is higher than the position HAD of the lower end 3TE2 of the vertical direction T in the plurality of absorbent articles 3. , Lower than the position HAM in the middle of the vertical direction T in the plurality of absorbent articles 3. Here, the distance between the position H1D at the lower end of the vertical weakening line 25 and the position HAD at the lower end 3TE2 of the absorbent article 3 is set to d11 (> 0), and the position HAD at the lower end 3TE2 of the absorbent article 3 and the upper end 3TE1. Assuming that the distance from the position HAU is dA0 (> 0), d11 <dA0 / 2. The same applies to the rear surface portion 12. Further, in the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 3, the position H2D of the lower end of the vertical direction T on the two vertical weakening lines 25 of the right surface portion 13 is the lower end 3TE2 of the vertical direction T in the plurality of absorbent articles 3. It is higher than the position HAD and lower than the position HAM in the middle of the vertical direction T in the plurality of absorbent articles 3. Here, if the distance between the position H2D at the lower end of the vertical weakening line 25 and the position HAD at the lower end 3TE2 of the absorbent article 3 is d21 (> 0), d21 <dA0 / 2. The same applies to the left surface portion 14. However, in the present embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 2 and 3, among the plurality of absorbent articles 3 stacked in a plurality of stages in the vertical direction T, the plurality of absorbent articles 3 in the uppermost stage are opened. The portion 20 is formed.
 更に、本実施形態では、開封部20は、包装袋2に収納された状態の複数の吸収性物品3における上下方向Tの上面部分(上端3TE1を含む)の一部を覆うように形成されている。この場合、その開封部20の横弱め線24は、その開封部20のうちの、複数の吸収性物品3における上下方向Tの上面部分(上端3TE1を含む)の一部を覆う部分20Uに形成されている。したがって、開封部20が開封され、部分20Uが除かれると、吸収性物品3における上下方向Tの上面部分(上端3TE1を含む)の一部分は露出されることになる。 Further, in the present embodiment, the opening portion 20 is formed so as to cover a part of the upper surface portion (including the upper end 3TE1) of the plurality of absorbent articles 3 in the state of being stored in the packaging bag 2 in the vertical direction T. There is. In this case, the lateral weakening line 24 of the opening portion 20 is formed in the portion 20U of the opening portion 20 that covers a part of the upper surface portion (including the upper end 3TE1) of the vertical direction T in the plurality of absorbent articles 3. Has been done. Therefore, when the opened portion 20 is opened and the portion 20U is removed, a part of the upper surface portion (including the upper end 3TE1) of the absorbent article 3 in the vertical direction T is exposed.
 例えば、図1及び図2に示すように、前面部11の開封部20は、複数の吸収性物品3における上下方向Tの上面部分(上端3TE1を含む)の一部を覆う部分20Uを含んでいる。この場合、前面部11の開封部20の横弱め線24は、その開封部20の部分20Uに形成されている。ここで、横弱め線24の下端の位置H1Uと、吸収性物品3の上端3TE1の位置HAUとの距離をd12とすると、d12>0となる。後面部12についても同様である。更に、本実施形態では、図1及び図3に示すように、右面部13の開封部20は、複数の吸収性物品3における上下方向Tの上面部分(上端3TE1を含む)の一部を覆う部分20Uを含んでいる。この場合、右面部13の開封部20の横弱め線24は、その開封部20の部分20Uに形成されている。ここで、横弱め線24の下端の位置H2Uと、吸収性物品3の上端3TE1の位置HAUとの距離をd22とすると、d22>0となる。左面部14についても同様である。なお、位置H1U、H2Uは、横弱め線24の下端の位置であり、かつ、縦弱め線25の上端の位置でもある。 For example, as shown in FIGS. 1 and 2, the opening portion 20 of the front surface portion 11 includes a portion 20U that covers a part of the upper surface portion (including the upper end 3TE1) of the vertical direction T in the plurality of absorbent articles 3. There is. In this case, the lateral weakening line 24 of the opening portion 20 of the front surface portion 11 is formed in the portion 20U of the opening portion 20. Here, assuming that the distance between the position H1U at the lower end of the lateral weakening line 24 and the position HAU at the upper end 3TE1 of the absorbent article 3 is d12, d12> 0. The same applies to the rear surface portion 12. Further, in the present embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 1 and 3, the opening portion 20 of the right surface portion 13 covers a part of the upper surface portion (including the upper end 3TE1) of the plurality of absorbent articles 3 in the vertical direction T. Includes portion 20U. In this case, the lateral weakening line 24 of the opening portion 20 of the right surface portion 13 is formed in the portion 20U of the opening portion 20. Here, assuming that the distance between the position H2U at the lower end of the lateral weakening line 24 and the position HAU at the upper end 3TE1 of the absorbent article 3 is d22, d22> 0. The same applies to the left surface portion 14. The positions H1U and H2U are the positions of the lower ends of the horizontal weakening line 24 and also the positions of the upper ends of the vertical weakening line 25.
 なお、包装体1(包装袋2)は前面部11、後面部12、右面部13及び左面部14の各々において第1弱め線21及び第2弱め線22を備えてもよいし、備えなくてもよい。包装体1(包装袋2)が各側面部に第1弱め線21及び第2弱め線22を備える場合には、それら第1弱め線21及び第2弱め線22は、例えば第1実施形態に記載のとおりある。 The package 1 (packaging bag 2) may or may not be provided with the first weakening line 21 and the second weakening line 22 in each of the front surface portion 11, the rear surface portion 12, the right surface portion 13, and the left surface portion 14. May be good. When the package 1 (packaging bag 2) is provided with the first weakening wire 21 and the second weakening wire 22 on each side surface portion, the first weakening wire 21 and the second weakening wire 22 are, for example, in the first embodiment. As stated.
 図12は、実施形態に係る包装体1を前面部11又は左面部14で開封した状態を示す模式図である。図12(a)に示すように、包装体1の前面部11において、開封部20の横弱め線24の切り離しを行い、横切断線24aを形成し、続けて二本の縦弱め線25の切り離しを行い、二本の縦切断線25aを形成する。それにより、開口部OPAが形成されて、前面部11の開封部20が開封される。そのとき、開口部OPAでは、吸収性物品3における上下方向Tの下側の部分が包装袋2に覆われつつ、それより上側の部分(半分以上の部分)が露出される。後面部12についても同様である。一方、図12(b)に示すように、包装体1の左面部14において、開封部20の横弱め線24の切り離しを行い、横切断線24aを形成し、続けて二本の縦弱め線25の切り離しを行い、二本の縦切断線25aを形成する。それにより、開口部OPBが形成されて、左面部14の開封部20が開封される。そのとき、開口部OPBでは、吸収性物品3における上下方向Tの下側の部分が包装袋2に覆われつつ、それより上側の部分(半分以上の部分)が露出される。右面部13についても同様である。 FIG. 12 is a schematic view showing a state in which the package 1 according to the embodiment is opened by the front surface portion 11 or the left surface portion 14. As shown in FIG. 12A, in the front surface portion 11 of the package 1, the lateral weakening line 24 of the opening portion 20 is separated to form the horizontal cutting line 24a, and subsequently, the two vertical weakening lines 25 are separated. Separation is performed to form two vertical cutting lines 25a. As a result, the opening OPA is formed, and the opening portion 20 of the front surface portion 11 is opened. At that time, in the opening OPA, the lower portion of the absorbent article 3 in the vertical direction T is covered with the packaging bag 2, while the upper portion (more than half of the portion) is exposed. The same applies to the rear surface portion 12. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 12B, in the left side portion 14 of the package 1, the lateral weakening line 24 of the opening portion 20 is separated to form the horizontal cutting line 24a, and then two vertical weakening lines are continuously formed. The 25 are separated to form two vertical cutting lines 25a. As a result, the opening OPB is formed, and the opening portion 20 of the left surface portion 14 is opened. At that time, in the opening OPB, the lower portion of the absorbent article 3 in the vertical direction T is covered with the packaging bag 2, while the upper portion (more than half of the portion) is exposed. The same applies to the right surface portion 13.
 本包装体1では、使用者は、包装袋2の開封部20において、横弱め線24及び二本の縦弱め線25の切り離しを行って、包装袋2に開口部OPA及び/又は開口部OPBを形成する。そして、その開口部OPA及び/又は開口部OPBから、包装袋2に収納された吸収性物品3を取り出すことができる。そのとき、二本の縦弱め線25における上下方向Tの下端の位置H1D及び/又は位置H2Dは、複数の吸収性物品3における上下方向Tの下端3TE2の位置HADよりも高い。そのため、開封部20を開封したとき、吸収性物品3の下側の部分が、開口部OPA及び/又は開口部OPBの下端よりも下側に位置することになり、包装袋2に保護されることになる。したがって、吸収性物品3が意図せずに開口部OPA及び/又は開口部OPBから外部へ脱落することを抑制できる。更に、吸収性物品3を取り出すとき、他の吸収性物品3が意図せずに開口部OPA及び/又は開口部OPBから外部へ脱落することを抑制できる。また、二本の縦弱め線25における上下方向Tの下端の位置H1D及び/又は位置H2Dは、複数の吸収性物品3における上下方向Tの中間の位置HAMよりも低い。そのため、開封部20を開封したとき、吸収性物品3の上側の半分以上の部分が、開口部OPA及び/又は開口部OPBの下端よりも上側に位置することになり、開口部OPA及び/又は開口部OPBから露出することになる。したがって、吸収性物品3を取り出すとき、開口部OPA及び/又は開口部OPBに引っ掛かることを抑制できる。このように、この包装体1において、開口部OPA及び/又は開口部OPBからの吸収性物品3の脱落を抑制することと、開口部OPA及び/又は開口部OPBからの吸収性物品3の取り出しを容易にすることとを両立できる。 In the present package 1, the user separates the horizontal weakening line 24 and the two vertical weakening lines 25 at the opening portion 20 of the packaging bag 2, and opens the opening OPA and / or the opening OPB in the packaging bag 2. To form. Then, the absorbent article 3 stored in the packaging bag 2 can be taken out from the opening OPA and / or the opening OPB. At that time, the position H1D and / or the position H2D of the lower end of the vertical direction T on the two vertical weakening lines 25 is higher than the position HAD of the lower end 3TE2 of the vertical direction T in the plurality of absorbent articles 3. Therefore, when the opening portion 20 is opened, the lower portion of the absorbent article 3 is located below the lower end of the opening OPA and / or the opening OPB, and is protected by the packaging bag 2. It will be. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the absorbent article 3 from unintentionally falling out of the opening OPA and / or the opening OPB. Further, when the absorbent article 3 is taken out, it is possible to prevent another absorbent article 3 from unintentionally falling out of the opening OPA and / or the opening OPB. Further, the position H1D and / or the position H2D at the lower end of the vertical direction T on the two vertical weakening lines 25 is lower than the position HAM in the middle of the vertical direction T in the plurality of absorbent articles 3. Therefore, when the opening portion 20 is opened, the upper half or more of the absorbent article 3 is located above the lower end of the opening OPA and / or the opening OPB, and the opening OPA and / or It will be exposed from the opening OPB. Therefore, when the absorbent article 3 is taken out, it can be prevented from being caught in the opening OPA and / or the opening OPB. As described above, in the package 1, the absorption article 3 is suppressed from falling out from the opening OPA and / or the opening OPB, and the absorbent article 3 is taken out from the opening OPA and / or the opening OPB. Can be compatible with facilitating.
 なお、上記のd11、d21、dA0の関係は、0<d11、d21<dA0・(1/2)であればよいが、脱落抑制の観点から、好ましくはdA0(1/20)<d11、d21であり、より好ましくはdA0(2/20)<d11、d21であり、更に好ましくはdA0(3/20)<d11、d21である。一方、上記のd11、d21、dA0の関係は、取り出し易さの観点から、好ましくはd11、d21<dA0・(9/20)であり、より好ましくはd11、d21<dA0・(8/20)であり、更に好ましくはd11、d21<dA0・(7/20)である。 The relationship between d11, d21, and dA0 may be 0 <d11, d21 <dA0 · (1/2), but dA0 (1/20) <d11, d21 is preferable from the viewpoint of suppressing dropout. It is more preferably dA0 (2/20) <d11, d21, and even more preferably dA0 (3/20) <d11, d21. On the other hand, the relationship between d11, d21 and dA0 is preferably d11, d21 <dA0 · (9/20), and more preferably d11, d21 <dA0 · (8/20) from the viewpoint of ease of extraction. , And more preferably d11, d21 <dA0 · (7/20).
 また、本実施形態では、図1~図4に示すように、開封部20は、前面部11及び後面部12の少なくとも一方、及び、右面部13及び左面部14の少なくとも一方の各々に、配置されていてもよい。すなわち、包装体1では、奥行方向Dに向いた開封部20(前面部11又は後面部12)、及び、幅方向Wに向いた開封部20(右面部13又は左面部14)が形成されている。そのため、使用者は、両開封部20を開口することで、幅方向W及び奥行方向Dの二方向に向いた開口部OPA及び開口部OPBのそれぞれから吸収性物品3を取り出すことができる。よって、任意の場所に包装体1を置いても、吸収性物品3をいずれかの方向の開口部OPA又は開口部OPBから容易に取り出すことができる。 Further, in the present embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 1 to 4, the opening portion 20 is arranged in at least one of the front surface portion 11 and the rear surface portion 12, and in at least one of the right surface portion 13 and the left surface portion 14. It may have been done. That is, in the package 1, an opening portion 20 (front surface portion 11 or rear surface portion 12) facing the depth direction D and an opening portion 20 (right surface portion 13 or left surface portion 14) facing the width direction W are formed. There is. Therefore, the user can take out the absorbent article 3 from each of the opening OPA and the opening OPB facing in the width direction W and the depth direction D by opening both the opening portions 20. Therefore, even if the package 1 is placed at an arbitrary place, the absorbent article 3 can be easily taken out from the opening OPA or the opening OPB in either direction.
 また、本実施形態では、図1~図4に示すように、開封部20は、包装袋2に収納された状態の複数の吸収性物品3における上下方向Tの上面部分(上端3TE1を含む)の一部を覆う部分20Uを有していてもよい。その場合、当該開封部20の横弱め線24は、その部分20Uに形成されている。そのため、開封部20を横弱め線24から開封したとき、包装袋2に収納された状態の複数の吸収性物品3における上面部分から側面部分までの領域が露出するように開口部OPA及び/又は開口部OPBを形成することができる。それにより、吸収性物品3を取り出すとき、吸収性物品3一つ一つを開口部OPA及び/又は開口部OPBで視認し易くすることできると共に、吸収性物品3の上面部分を開口部OPA及び/又は開口部OPBの上面部15側の端に引っ掛かり難くすることができる。したがって、吸収性物品3を開口部OPA及び/又は開口部OPBからより容易に取り出すことができる。 Further, in the present embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 1 to 4, the opening portion 20 is the upper surface portion (including the upper end 3TE1) of the plurality of absorbent articles 3 in the state of being stored in the packaging bag 2 in the vertical direction T. It may have a portion 20U that covers a part of the above. In that case, the lateral weakening line 24 of the opening portion 20 is formed in the portion 20U. Therefore, when the opening portion 20 is opened from the lateral weakening line 24, the opening OPA and / or the opening opening OPA and / or so that the region from the upper surface portion to the side surface portion of the plurality of absorbent articles 3 stored in the packaging bag 2 is exposed. The opening OPB can be formed. Thereby, when the absorbent article 3 is taken out, each of the absorbent articles 3 can be easily seen by the opening OPA and / or the opening OPB, and the upper surface portion of the absorbent article 3 can be easily seen by the opening OPA and / or the opening OPA and / or the opening OPB. / Or it can be made difficult to get caught in the end on the upper surface portion 15 side of the opening OPB. Therefore, the absorbent article 3 can be more easily removed from the opening OPA and / or the opening OPB.
 また、本実施形態では、図1~図4に示すように、複数の吸収性物品3は、上下方向に少なくとも二段に積層されていてもよい。その場合、二本の縦弱め線25における上下方向Tの下端の位置H1D及び/又は位置H2Dは、複数の吸収性物品3のうちの最上段の吸収性物品3における上下方向Tの下端の位置HADよりも高く、最上段の吸収性物品3における上下方向Tの中間の位置HAMよりも低い。そのため、複数の吸収性物品3のうちの最上段の吸収性物品3について、開口部OPA及び/又は開口部OPBから外部へ脱落することや、取り出すときに開口部OPA及び/又は開口部OPBに引っ掛かることを抑制できる。更に、複数の吸収性物品3が少なくとも二段に積層されていても、上側の段の吸収性物品3から順に取り出せるので、吸収性物品3の一部又は全部が開口部OPA及び/又は開口部OPBから外にこぼれ出ることもなく、吸収性物品3を容易に取り出すことができる。また、未使用の下側の段の吸収性物品3は取り出すまで包装袋2に覆われているので、その清潔性を保つことができる。このように、この包装体1において、開口部OPA及び/又は開口部OPBからの吸収性物品3の脱落を抑制することと、開口部OPA及び/又は開口部OPBからの吸収性物品3の取り出しを容易にすることとを両立でき、下側の段の吸収性物品3の清潔性を保つことができる。 Further, in the present embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 1 to 4, the plurality of absorbent articles 3 may be stacked in at least two stages in the vertical direction. In that case, the position H1D and / or the position H2D of the lower end of the vertical direction T on the two vertical weakening lines 25 is the position of the lower end of the vertical direction T in the uppermost absorbent article 3 among the plurality of absorbent articles 3. It is higher than HAD and lower than the position HAM in the middle of the vertical direction T in the uppermost absorbent article 3. Therefore, the uppermost absorbent article 3 among the plurality of absorbent articles 3 may fall out from the opening OPA and / or the opening OPB, or may fall into the opening OPA and / or the opening OPB when taken out. It is possible to prevent it from getting caught. Further, even if a plurality of absorbent articles 3 are laminated in at least two stages, they can be taken out in order from the absorbent articles 3 in the upper stage, so that a part or all of the absorbent articles 3 is an opening OPA and / or an opening. The absorbent article 3 can be easily taken out without spilling out from the OPB. Further, since the unused absorbent article 3 in the lower stage is covered with the packaging bag 2 until it is taken out, its cleanliness can be maintained. As described above, in the package 1, the absorption article 3 is suppressed from falling out from the opening OPA and / or the opening OPB, and the absorbent article 3 is taken out from the opening OPA and / or the opening OPB. It is possible to maintain the cleanliness of the absorbent article 3 in the lower stage.
 図13は、実施形態に係る縦弱め線及び横弱め線の構成例を示す模式図である。本実施形態では、複数の側面部の各々において、幅方向W又は奥行方向D(包装袋2の表面に沿う底面部16に平行な方向)における二本の縦弱め線25間の距離L1は、幅方向W又は奥行方向Dにおける複数の側面部の各々の長さL0の30%以上、80%以下であってもよい。すなわち、L1とL0との関係は、0.3<L1/L0<0.8である。したがって、開封部20の開口部OPA及び/又は開口部OPBの長さを側面部の長さの30%~80%とし、側面部の開口部OPA及び/又は開口部OPB以外の部分の長さを側面部の長さの70~20%としている。開封部20の開口部OPA及び/又は開口部OPBの長さを30%以上とすることで、開口部OPA及び/又は開口部OPBの間口が広がるので、開口部OPA及び/又は開口部OPBから吸収性物品3をより容易に取り出すことができる。更に、開封部20の開口部OPA及び/又は開口部OPBの長さを80%以下とすることで、側面部の開口部OPA及び/又は開口部OPB以外の部分の長さを20%超とできるので、包装体1(包装袋2)の形状を崩れに難くすることができる。よって、包装袋2の全体の形状を崩さずに、側面部から吸収性物品3を容易に取り出すことができる。L1とL0との関係は、好ましくは0.35<L1/L0<0.75であり、より好ましくは0.4<L1/L0<0.7である。なお、図13は右側部13部又は左側部14の場合を示すが、前側部11及び/又は後側部12でも同様である。 FIG. 13 is a schematic diagram showing a configuration example of a vertical weakening line and a horizontal weakening line according to an embodiment. In the present embodiment, the distance L1 between the two vertical weakening lines 25 in the width direction W or the depth direction D (direction parallel to the bottom surface portion 16 along the surface of the packaging bag 2) is set on each of the plurality of side surface portions. It may be 30% or more and 80% or less of the length L0 of each of the plurality of side surface portions in the width direction W or the depth direction D. That is, the relationship between L1 and L0 is 0.3 <L1 / L0 <0.8. Therefore, the length of the opening OPA and / or the opening OPB of the opening portion 20 is set to 30% to 80% of the length of the side surface portion, and the length of the portion other than the opening OPA and / or the opening OPB of the side surface portion is set. Is 70 to 20% of the length of the side surface portion. By setting the length of the opening OPA and / or the opening OPB of the opening 20 to 30% or more, the frontage of the opening OPA and / or the opening OPB is widened, so that the opening OPA and / or the opening OPB can be used. The absorbent article 3 can be taken out more easily. Further, by setting the length of the opening OPA and / or the opening OPB of the opening portion 20 to 80% or less, the length of the portion other than the opening OPA and / or the opening OPB of the side surface portion becomes more than 20%. Therefore, the shape of the package 1 (packaging bag 2) can be made difficult to collapse. Therefore, the absorbent article 3 can be easily taken out from the side surface portion without breaking the overall shape of the packaging bag 2. The relationship between L1 and L0 is preferably 0.35 <L1 / L0 <0.75, and more preferably 0.4 <L1 / L0 <0.7. Note that FIG. 13 shows the case of the right side portion 13 or the left side portion 14, but the same applies to the front side portion 11 and / or the rear side portion 12.
 図14は、実施形態に係る縦弱め線及び横弱め線の構成例を示す模式図である。本実施形態では、横弱め線24が、中央に位置する中央横弱め線24mと、中央横弱め線24mの両側に位置する端部横弱め線24eと、を含んでいてもよい。その場合、中央横弱め線24mは、間欠的に配置された複数の中央横弱め部分24mwと、隣り合う中央横弱め部分24mw間に位置する複数の中央非横弱め部分24mvとで構成されている。また、端部横弱め線24eは、間欠的に配置された複数の端部横弱め部分24ewと、隣り合う端部横弱め部分24ew間に位置する複数の端部非横弱め部分24evとで構成されている。更に、縦弱め線25は、間欠的に配置された複数の縦弱め部分と、隣り合う縦弱め部分間に位置する複数の非縦弱め部分とで構成されている(符号省略)。ここで、中央横弱め線24mのピッチをLP1とし、中央横弱め部分24mw及び中央非横弱め部分24mvの長さをそれぞれLW1、LV1とする。また、端部横弱め線24eのピッチをLP2とし、端部横弱め部分24ew及び端部非横弱め部分24evの長さをそれぞれLW2、LV2とする。なお、縦弱め線25のピッチは、端部横弱め線24eのピッチと同じであり、縦弱め部分及び非縦弱め部分の長さは、端部横弱め部分24ew及び端部非横弱め部分24evの長さと同じとする。 FIG. 14 is a schematic diagram showing a configuration example of a vertical weakening line and a horizontal weakening line according to an embodiment. In the present embodiment, the lateral weakening line 24 may include a central lateral weakening line 24m located at the center and end lateral weakening lines 24e located on both sides of the central lateral weakening line 24m. In that case, the central lateral weakening line 24m is composed of a plurality of central lateral weakening portions 24mw arranged intermittently and a plurality of central non-lateral weakening portions 24mv located between adjacent central lateral weakening portions 24mw. .. Further, the end lateral weakening line 24e is composed of a plurality of end lateral weakening portions 24ew arranged intermittently and a plurality of end non-laterally weakening portions 24ev located between adjacent end lateral weakening portions 24ew. Has been done. Further, the vertical weakening line 25 is composed of a plurality of vertically weakening portions arranged intermittently and a plurality of non-vertical weakening portions located between adjacent vertical weakening portions (reference numerals omitted). Here, the pitch of the central lateral weakening line 24m is LP1, and the lengths of the central lateral weakening portion 24mw and the central non-lateral weakening portion 24mv are LW1 and LV1, respectively. Further, the pitch of the end lateral weakening line 24e is LP2, and the lengths of the end laterally weakening portion 24ew and the end non-laterally weakening portion 24ev are LW2 and LV2, respectively. The pitch of the vertical weakening line 25 is the same as the pitch of the end horizontal weakening line 24e, and the lengths of the vertical weakening portion and the non-vertical weakening portion are the end horizontal weakening portion 24ew and the end non-horizontal weakening portion 24ev. Same as the length of.
 本実施形態では、図14に示すように、横弱め線24における幅方向W又は奥行方向D(包装袋2の表面に沿う底面部16に平行な方向)の中央部分(中央横弱め線24m)を構成する弱め部(中央横弱め部分24mw)同士の距離(中央非横弱め部分24mvの長さLV1)は、二本の縦弱め線25の各々を構成する弱め部同士の距離(端部非横弱め部分24evの長さLV2)よりも短くてもよい。すなわち、LV1<LV2であってもよい。そのため、開封部20を開封するとき、横弱め線24の中央横弱め線24mに指を入れ易くすることができる。それにより、横弱め線24の切り離しを容易に開始することができ、更に、横弱め線24の切り離しに続けて、二本の縦弱め線25の各々の切り離しを容易に行うことができる。したがって、開封部20の開口部OPA及び/又は開口部OPBの形成を容易に行うことができ、吸収性物品3を開口部OPA及び/又は開口部OPBからより容易に取り出すことができる。また、更に、LW1<LW2であってもよく、LP1<LP2であってもよい。それにより、横弱め線24全体の切り離しを容易に行うことができ、更に、横弱め線24の切り離しに続けて、二本の縦弱め線25の各々の切り離しを容易に行うことができる。また、二本の縦弱め線25の各々を構成する弱め部同士の距離が、横弱め線24を構成する弱め部同士の距離よりも長くてもよい。なお、図14は右側部13部又は左側部14の場合を示すが、前側部11及び/又は後側部12でも同様である。 In the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 14, the central portion (center lateral weakening line 24m) of the width direction W or the depth direction D (direction parallel to the bottom surface portion 16 along the surface of the packaging bag 2) in the lateral weakening line 24. The distance between the weakened portions (central horizontal weakened portion 24 mw) (the length LV1 of the central non-horizontal weakened portion 24 mv) is the distance between the weakened portions constituting each of the two vertical weakened lines 25 (the end portion is not). It may be shorter than the length LV2) of the laterally weakened portion 24 ev. That is, LV1 <LV2 may be satisfied. Therefore, when opening the opening portion 20, it is possible to easily put a finger in the central lateral weakening line 24m of the lateral weakening line 24. Thereby, the separation of the horizontal weakening line 24 can be easily started, and further, the separation of each of the two vertical weakening lines 25 can be easily performed following the separation of the horizontal weakening line 24. Therefore, the opening OPA and / or the opening OPB of the opening portion 20 can be easily formed, and the absorbent article 3 can be more easily taken out from the opening OPA and / or the opening OPB. Further, LW1 <LW2 may be used, or LP1 <LP2 may be used. Thereby, the entire horizontal weakening line 24 can be easily separated, and further, each of the two vertical weakening lines 25 can be easily separated following the separation of the horizontal weakening line 24. Further, the distance between the weakening portions constituting each of the two vertical weakening lines 25 may be longer than the distance between the weakening portions constituting the horizontal weakening line 24. Note that FIG. 14 shows the case of the right side portion 13 or the left side portion 14, but the same applies to the front side portion 11 and / or the rear side portion 12.
 実施形態に係る包装体1の製造方法については、弱め線形成工程における縦弱め線25及び横弱め線24の形成を必須とし、第1弱め線21及び第2弱め線22の形成を選択肢とする他は、第1実施形態の製造方法と同様である。 Regarding the method for manufacturing the package 1 according to the embodiment, it is essential to form the vertical weakening line 25 and the horizontal weakening line 24 in the weakening line forming step, and the formation of the first weakening line 21 and the second weakening line 22 is an option. Others are the same as the manufacturing method of the first embodiment.
 図15は、実施形態に係る包装体1の他の構成例を模式的に示す正面図及び右側面図である。この図では、包装体1の他の構成例の正面図と右側面図とを隣接させて描いている。本実施形態では、右面部13及び左面部14の少なくとも一方と、前面部11及び後面部12の少なくとも一方と、において、二本の縦弱め線25における上下方向Tの下端の位置H2D及び位置H1Dは同じであってもよい。例えば、右面部13における二本の縦弱め線25の下端の位置H2Dと、前面部11における二本の縦弱め線25の下端の位置H1Dと、は同じであってもよい。そのため、右面部13又は左面部14の開封部20、すなわち幅方向Wに開口する開封部20と、前面部11又は後面部12の開封部20、すなわち奥行方向Dに開口する開封部20と、を両方開封しても、開口部OPB及び開口部OPAの下端の位置H2D、H1Dを同じに揃えることができる。それにより、使用者が、いずれか一方の開封部20の下端の位置H2D又はH1Dを一度把握してしまえば、いずれの開封部20から吸収性物品3を取り出す場合でも、下端の位置H2D又はH1Dをその度に目で見て確認せずとも、側面部から吸収性物品3を容易に取り出すことができる。 FIG. 15 is a front view and a right side view schematically showing another configuration example of the package 1 according to the embodiment. In this figure, the front view and the right side view of another configuration example of the package 1 are drawn adjacent to each other. In the present embodiment, at least one of the right surface portion 13 and the left surface portion 14, and at least one of the front surface portion 11 and the rear surface portion 12, the positions H2D and the positions H1D of the lower ends of the vertical weakening lines 25 on the two vertical weakening lines 25. May be the same. For example, the position H2D at the lower end of the two vertical weakening lines 25 on the right surface portion 13 and the position H1D at the lower end of the two vertical weakening lines 25 on the front surface portion 11 may be the same. Therefore, the opening portion 20 of the right surface portion 13 or the left surface portion 14, that is, the opening portion 20 that opens in the width direction W, and the opening portion 20 of the front surface portion 11 or the rear surface portion 12, that is, the opening portion 20 that opens in the depth direction D. Even if both are opened, the positions H2D and H1D at the lower ends of the opening OPB and the opening OPA can be aligned in the same manner. As a result, once the user grasps the position H2D or H1D of the lower end of either opening portion 20, even when the absorbent article 3 is taken out from any opening portion 20, the position of the lower end H2D or H1D The absorbent article 3 can be easily taken out from the side surface portion without visually confirming each time.
 また、本実施形態では、図15に示すように、右面部13及び左面部14の少なくとも一方と、前面部11及び後面部12の少なくとも一方と、において、二本の縦弱め線25における上下方向Tの上端の位置H2U及び位置H1Uは同じであってもよい。例えば、右面部13における二本の縦弱め線25の上端の位置H2Uと、前面部11における二本の縦弱め線25の上端の位置H1Uと、は同じであってもよい。そのため、右面部13又は左面部14の開封部20、すなわち幅方向Wに開口する開封部20と、前面部11又は後面部12の開封部20、すなわち奥行方向Dに開口する開封部20と、を両方開封しても、開口部OPB及び開口部OPAの上端の位置H2U、H1Uを同じに揃えることができる。それにより、使用者が、いずれか一方の開封部20の上端の位置H2U又はH1Uを一度把握してしまえば、いずれの開封部20から吸収性物品3を取り出す場合でも、上端の位置H2U又はH1Uをその度に目で見て確認せずとも、側面部から吸収性物品3を容易に取り出すことができる。 Further, in the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 15, at least one of the right surface portion 13 and the left surface portion 14 and at least one of the front surface portion 11 and the rear surface portion 12 in the vertical direction on the two vertical weakening lines 25. The position H2U and the position H1U at the upper end of T may be the same. For example, the position H2U at the upper end of the two vertical weakening lines 25 on the right surface portion 13 and the position H1U at the upper end of the two vertical weakening lines 25 on the front surface portion 11 may be the same. Therefore, the opening portion 20 of the right surface portion 13 or the left surface portion 14, that is, the opening portion 20 that opens in the width direction W, and the opening portion 20 of the front surface portion 11 or the rear surface portion 12, that is, the opening portion 20 that opens in the depth direction D. Even if both are opened, the positions H2U and H1U at the upper ends of the opening OPB and the opening OPA can be aligned in the same manner. As a result, once the user has grasped the position H2U or H1U of the upper end of either opening portion 20, even when the absorbent article 3 is taken out from any opening portion 20, the position of the upper end H2U or H1U The absorbent article 3 can be easily taken out from the side surface portion without visually confirming each time.
 また、本実施形態では、図15に示すように、右面部13及び左面部14の少なくとも一方における、二本の縦弱め線25のうちの前面部11側の縦弱め線25と、その右面部13及び左面部14の少なくとも一方と前面部11との境界線CLと、の距離d23は、前面部11における、二本の縦弱め線25のうちの、その右面部13及び左面部14の少なくとも一方の側の縦弱め線25と、その境界線CLと、の距離d13と、同じであってもよい。例えば、右面部13における前面部11側の縦弱め線25と、右面部13と前面部11との境界線CLと、の距離d23は、前面部11における右面部13側の縦弱め線25と、その境界線CLと、の距離d13と、同じであってもよい。
 ここで、右面部13又は左面部14における前面部11側の縦弱め線25と、境界線CLと、の距離d23は、右面部13又は左面部14における開封部20の開口部OPBの両外側の部分の幅である。一方、前面部11における右面部13側又は左面部14側の縦弱め線25と、境界線CLと、の距離d13は、前面部11における開封部20の開口部OPAの両外側の部分の幅である。これら開封部20の開口部OPB及び開口部OPAの両外側の部分は、開封後の側面部の形状の維持、延いては包装体1の形状の維持に必要な部分である。したがって、これらの部分の幅のバランスが悪いと、開封後の側面部や包装体1の形状の維持が困難となる。そこで、この包装体1では、これらの幅が側面部ごとに大きく異なることがないように所定の同一の幅を持たせている。それにより、開封後の側面部や包装体1の形状を維持し易くしている。それにより、開封部の開口部OPB及び開口部OPAの形状が維持されて、吸収性物品3の取り出し易さを維持できる。
Further, in the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 15, the vertical weakening line 25 on the front surface 11 side of the two vertical weakening lines 25 on at least one of the right surface portion 13 and the left surface portion 14 and the right surface portion thereof. The distance d23 between at least one of 13 and the left surface portion 14 and the boundary line CL between the front surface portion 11 is the distance d23 of at least the right surface portion 13 and the left surface portion 14 of the two vertical weakening lines 25 in the front surface portion 11. The distance d13 between the vertical weakening line 25 on one side and the boundary line CL thereof may be the same. For example, the distance d23 between the vertical weakening line 25 on the front surface portion 11 side of the right surface portion 13 and the boundary line CL between the right surface portion 13 and the front surface portion 11 is the vertical weakening line 25 on the right surface portion 13 side of the front surface portion 11. , The boundary line CL and the distance d13 may be the same.
Here, the distance d23 between the vertical weakening line 25 on the front surface portion 11 side of the right surface portion 13 or the left surface portion 14 and the boundary line CL is set on both outer sides of the opening OPB of the opening portion 20 of the right surface portion 13 or the left surface portion 14. The width of the part. On the other hand, the distance d13 between the vertical weakening line 25 on the right surface portion 13 side or the left surface portion 14 side in the front surface portion 11 and the boundary line CL is the width of both outer portions of the opening OPA of the opening portion 20 in the front surface portion 11. Is. Both outer portions of the opening OPB and the opening OPA of the opening portion 20 are portions necessary for maintaining the shape of the side surface portion after opening and, by extension, maintaining the shape of the package 1. Therefore, if the widths of these portions are not well balanced, it becomes difficult to maintain the shape of the side surface portion and the package 1 after opening. Therefore, in this package 1, a predetermined same width is provided so that these widths do not differ greatly from side to side. This makes it easier to maintain the shape of the side surface portion and the package 1 after opening. As a result, the shapes of the opening OPB and the opening OPA of the opened portion are maintained, and the ease of taking out the absorbent article 3 can be maintained.
 また、同様の理由から、右面部13及び左面部14の少なくとも一方における、二本の縦弱め線25のうちの後面部12側の縦弱め線25と、その右面部13及び左面部14の少なくとも一方と後面部12との境界線CLと、の距離は、後面部12における、二本の縦弱め線25のうちの、その右面部13及び左面部14の少なくとも一方の側の縦弱め線25と、その境界線CLと、の距離d13と、同じであってもよい。例えば、右面部13における後面部12側の縦弱め線25と、右面部13と後面部12との境界線CLと、の距離d23は、後面部12における右面部13側の縦弱め線25と、その境界線CLと、の距離と、同じであってもよい。 Further, for the same reason, at least one of the right surface portion 13 and the left surface portion 14, the vertical weakening line 25 on the rear surface portion 12 side of the two vertical weakening lines 25, and at least the right surface portion 13 and the left surface portion 14. The distance between one and the boundary line CL between the rear surface portion 12 is the vertical weakening line 25 on at least one side of the right surface portion 13 and the left surface portion 14 of the two vertical weakening lines 25 in the rear surface portion 12. And the boundary line CL may be the same as the distance d13. For example, the distance d23 between the vertical weakening line 25 on the rear surface portion 12 side of the right surface portion 13 and the boundary line CL between the right surface portion 13 and the rear surface portion 12 is the vertical weakening line 25 on the right surface portion 13 side of the rear surface portion 12. , The boundary line CL and the distance may be the same.
 本発明の包装体1は、上述した実施形態に制限されることなく、技術的矛盾が生じない限り、本発明の目的、趣旨を逸脱しない範囲内において、他の技術の追加・置換等により適用が可能である。 The package 1 of the present invention is not limited to the above-described embodiment, and is applied by addition / replacement of other techniques without departing from the spirit and purpose of the present invention, as long as there is no technical contradiction. Is possible.
 1  包装体
 3  吸収性物品
 11  前面部
 12  後面部
 13  右面部
 14  左面部
 19  角部
 21  第1弱め線
 22  第2弱め線
1 Package 3 Absorbent article 11 Front part 12 Rear part 13 Right side part 14 Left side part 19 Square part 21 1st weakening line 22 2nd weakening line

Claims (21)

  1.  幅方向、奥行方向、及び上下方向を有し、複数の吸収性物品と、複数の側面部を有し、前記複数の吸収性物品を収納する包装袋と、を備える包装体であって、
     前記複数の側面部は、前面部、後面部、右面部、及び左面部を含み、
     前記包装袋は、前記前面部と前記右面部とが交わる部分、前記前面部と前記左面部とが交わる部分、前記後面部と前記右面部とが交わる部分、及び前記後面部と前記左面部とが交わる部分の各々に角部を有し、
     前記前面部及び前記後面部の各々において前記幅方向に沿って延びるように形成され、前記右面部及び前記左面部の各々において前記奥行方向に沿って延びるように形成された第1弱め線と、
     前記角部を跨ぐように形成された第2弱め線と、
     を備え、
     隣り合う前記第1弱め線同士は、前記角部で互いに離間しており、
     隣り合う前記第1弱め線と前記第2弱め線とは、互いに離間しており、
     隣り合う前記第2弱め線と前記第1弱め線との距離は、隣り合う前記第1弱め線同士の距離よりも短く、
     前記第2弱め線の端部の延長線は、当該第2弱め線の端部と隣り合う前記第1弱め線と交差する、
     包装体。
    A package having a width direction, a depth direction, and a vertical direction, a plurality of absorbent articles, and a packaging bag having a plurality of side surfaces and storing the plurality of absorbent articles.
    The plurality of side surface portions include a front surface portion, a rear surface portion, a right surface portion, and a left surface portion.
    The packaging bag includes a portion where the front surface portion and the right surface portion intersect, a portion where the front surface portion and the left surface portion intersect, a portion where the rear surface portion and the right surface portion intersect, and a rear surface portion and the left surface portion. Each of the intersections has a corner,
    A first weakening line formed so as to extend along the width direction in each of the front surface portion and the rear surface portion, and extending along the depth direction in each of the right surface portion and the left surface portion.
    A second weakening line formed so as to straddle the corner portion,
    Equipped with
    The adjacent first weakening lines are separated from each other at the corners.
    The adjacent first weakening line and the second weakening line are separated from each other.
    The distance between the adjacent second weakening line and the first weakening line is shorter than the distance between the adjacent first weakening lines.
    The extension of the end of the second weakening line intersects the first weakening line adjacent to the end of the second weakening line.
    Packaging body.
  2.  前記第2弱め線の少なくとも端部は、隣り合う前記第1弱め線と、前記上下方向において重なる、
     請求項1に記載の包装体。
    At least the end of the second weakening line overlaps with the adjacent first weakening line in the vertical direction.
    The package according to claim 1.
  3.  前記第1弱め線は、前記上下方向における前記複数の吸収性物品の上側の端縁と同じ位置又は前記端縁よりも上側の位置に形成さており、
     前記第2弱め線は、前記第1弱め線よりも前記上下方向の上側の位置に形成されている、
     請求項1又は2に記載の包装体。
    The first weakening line is formed at the same position as the upper edge of the plurality of absorbent articles in the vertical direction or at a position above the edge.
    The second weakening line is formed at a position above the first weakening line in the vertical direction.
    The package according to claim 1 or 2.
  4.  前記第2弱め線の少なくとも端部の延長線は、隣り合う前記第1弱め線に対して鋭角に交差する、
     請求項1乃至3のいずれか一項に記載の包装体。
    The extension of at least the end of the second weakening line intersects the adjacent first weakening line at an acute angle.
    The package according to any one of claims 1 to 3.
  5.  前記第2弱め線は、前記第2弱め線における前記包装体の表面に沿った方向の中央部を頂点とする、前記上下方向の上側又は下側に凸の形状を有する、
     請求項1乃至4のいずれか一項に記載の包装体。
    The second weakening line has a convex shape on the upper side or the lower side in the vertical direction, with the central portion of the second weakening line in the direction along the surface of the package as an apex.
    The package according to any one of claims 1 to 4.
  6.  前記前面部、前記後面部、前記右面部、及び前記左面部の各々における前記上下方向の上側の部分に設けられた取手部を更に備える、
     請求項1乃至5のいずれか一項に記載の包装体。
    Further provided with a handle portion provided on the upper portion in the vertical direction in each of the front surface portion, the rear surface portion, the right surface portion, and the left surface portion.
    The package according to any one of claims 1 to 5.
  7.  前記右面部及び前記左面部は、それぞれ前記前面部及び前記後面部との間における、前記幅方向の右側及び左側に谷折りに折り畳まれた部分であり、
     前記右面部と前記前面部との前記角部の前記第2弱め線は、前記右面部と前記前面部との境界線に対して線対称な形状を有し、前記右面部と前記後面部との前記角部の前記第2弱め線は、前記右面部と前記後面部との境界線に対して線対称な形状を有し、前記左面部と前記前面部との前記角部の前記第2弱め線は、前記左面部と前記前面部との境界線に対して線対称な形状を有し、前記左面部と前記後面部との前記角部の前記第2弱め線は、前記左面部と前記後面部との境界線に対して線対称な形状を有する、
     請求項1乃至6のいずれか一項に記載の包装体。
    The right surface portion and the left surface portion are portions between the front surface portion and the rear surface portion, respectively, which are folded into valley folds on the right side and the left side in the width direction.
    The second weakening line of the corner portion between the right surface portion and the front surface portion has a shape symmetrical with respect to the boundary line between the right surface portion and the front surface portion, and the right surface portion and the rear surface portion. The second weakening line of the corner portion has a shape symmetrical with respect to the boundary line between the right surface portion and the rear surface portion, and the second weakening line of the corner portion between the left surface portion and the front surface portion. The weakening line has a shape symmetrical with respect to the boundary line between the left surface portion and the front surface portion, and the second weakening line at the corner portion between the left surface portion and the rear surface portion is the left surface portion. It has a shape that is axisymmetric with respect to the boundary line with the rear surface portion.
    The package according to any one of claims 1 to 6.
  8.  前記第1弱め線は、前記上下方向における前記包装体に収納された前記複数の吸収性物品の上側の端縁と同じ位置又は前記端縁よりも上側の位置に形成されており、
     前記第2弱め線は、前記第1弱め線よりも前記上下方向の上側に位置している、
     請求項7に記載の包装体。
    The first weakening line is formed at the same position as the upper edge of the plurality of absorbent articles housed in the package in the vertical direction or at a position above the edge.
    The second weakening line is located above the first weakening line in the vertical direction.
    The package according to claim 7.
  9.  隣り合う前記第1弱め線と前記第2弱め線との距離は、前記第1弱め線を構成する弱め部分同士の距離よりも長い、
     請求項1乃至8のいずれか一項に記載の包装体。
    The distance between the adjacent first weakening line and the second weakening line is longer than the distance between the weakening portions constituting the first weakening line.
    The package according to any one of claims 1 to 8.
  10.  前記第2弱め線は、前記包装体の表面に沿った方向の中央を頂点とするアーチ型の形状を有する、
     請求項1乃至9のいずれか一項に記載の包装体。
    The second weakening line has an arch-shaped shape whose apex is the center in the direction along the surface of the package.
    The package according to any one of claims 1 to 9.
  11.  幅方向、奥行方向、及び上下方向を有し、複数の吸収性物品と、複数の側面部を有し、前記複数の吸収性物品を収納する包装袋と、を備える包装体であって、
     前記複数の側面部は、前面部、後面部、右面部、及び左面部を含み、
     前記包装袋は、前記前面部と前記右面部とが交わる部分、前記前面部と前記左面部とが交わる部分、前記後面部と前記右面部とが交わる部分、及び前記後面部と前記左面部とが交わる部分の各々に角部を有し、
     前記前面部及び前記後面部の各々において前記幅方向に沿って延びるように形成され、前記右面部及び前記左面部の各々において前記奥行方向に沿って延びるように形成された第1弱め線と、
     前記角部を跨ぐように形成された第2弱め線と、
     を備え、
     前記第2弱め線は、隣り合う少なくとも一つの前記第1弱め線の切り離しが行われ、前記前面部、前記後面部、前記右面部、及び前記左面部の少なくとも一つの前記第1弱め線よりも前記上下方向の上側の部分が把持されて、前記包装体が持ち上げられたとき、前記複数の吸収性物品の重みで、前記第1弱め線の切り離しが、前記角部に伝搬したとしても、到達できない位置、に形成されている、
     包装体。
    A package having a width direction, a depth direction, and a vertical direction, a plurality of absorbent articles, and a packaging bag having a plurality of side surfaces and storing the plurality of absorbent articles.
    The plurality of side surface portions include a front surface portion, a rear surface portion, a right surface portion, and a left surface portion.
    The packaging bag includes a portion where the front surface portion and the right surface portion intersect, a portion where the front surface portion and the left surface portion intersect, a portion where the rear surface portion and the right surface portion intersect, and a rear surface portion and the left surface portion. Each of the intersections has a corner,
    A first weakening line formed so as to extend along the width direction in each of the front surface portion and the rear surface portion, and extending along the depth direction in each of the right surface portion and the left surface portion.
    A second weakening line formed so as to straddle the corner portion,
    Equipped with
    The second weakening line is separated from at least one adjacent first weakening line, and is more than at least one of the front surface portion, the rear surface portion, the right surface portion, and the left surface portion. When the upper portion in the vertical direction is grasped and the package is lifted, the weight of the plurality of absorbent articles reaches even if the disconnection of the first weakening line propagates to the corner portion. It is formed in a position that cannot be done,
    Packaging body.
  12.  幅方向、奥行方向、及び上下方向を有し、複数の吸収性物品と、複数の側面部を有し、前記複数の吸収性物品を収納する包装袋と、を備える包装体であって、
     前記複数の側面部は、前面部、後面部、右面部、及び左面部を含み、
     前記包装袋は、前記複数の側面部の少なくとも一つに開封部を含み、
     前記開封部は、
      前記上下方向に沿って延び、前記幅方向又は前記奥行方向に間隔を空けて並んだ二本の縦弱め線と、
      前記幅方向又は前記奥行方向に沿って延び、前記二本の縦弱め線における前記上下方向の上側の端部同士をつなぐ横弱め線と、
     を含み、
     前記複数の吸収性物品は、前記包装体内で縦置きに、前記幅方向又は前記奥行方向に整列されており、
     前記二本の縦弱め線における前記上下方向の下端の位置は、
      前記複数の吸収性物品における前記上下方向の下端の位置よりも高く、
      前記複数の吸収性物品における前記上下方向の中間の位置よりも低い、
     包装体。
    A package having a width direction, a depth direction, and a vertical direction, a plurality of absorbent articles, and a packaging bag having a plurality of side surfaces and storing the plurality of absorbent articles.
    The plurality of side surface portions include a front surface portion, a rear surface portion, a right surface portion, and a left surface portion.
    The packaging bag includes an opening portion in at least one of the plurality of side portions.
    The opened part is
    Two vertical weakening lines extending along the vertical direction and lined up at intervals in the width direction or the depth direction,
    A horizontal weakening line that extends along the width direction or the depth direction and connects the upper ends of the two vertical weakening lines in the vertical direction.
    Including
    The plurality of absorbent articles are arranged vertically in the package in the width direction or the depth direction.
    The position of the lower end in the vertical direction on the two vertical weakening lines is
    Higher than the position of the lower end in the vertical direction in the plurality of absorbent articles,
    Lower than the vertical intermediate position in the plurality of absorbent articles,
    Packaging body.
  13.  前記開封部は、前記前面部及び前記後面部の少なくとも一方、及び、前記右面部及び前記左面部の少なくとも一方の各々に、配置されている、
     請求項12に記載の包装体。
    The opening portion is arranged on at least one of the front surface portion and the rear surface portion, and at least one of the right surface portion and the left surface portion.
    The package according to claim 12.
  14.  前記開封部は、前記包装袋に収納された状態の前記複数の吸収性物品における前記上下方向の上面部分の一部を覆うように形成され、
     当該開封部の前記横弱め線は、当該開封部における前記上面部分の一部を覆う部分に形成されている、
     請求項12又は13に記載の包装体。
    The opening portion is formed so as to cover a part of the upper surface portion in the vertical direction of the plurality of absorbent articles in a state of being stored in the packaging bag.
    The lateral weakening line of the opened portion is formed in a portion of the opened portion that covers a part of the upper surface portion.
    The package according to claim 12 or 13.
  15.  前記複数の側面部の各々において、前記幅方向又は前記奥行方向における前記二本の縦弱め線間の距離は、前記幅方向又は前記奥行方向における前記複数の側面部の各々の長さの30%以上、80%以下である、
     請求項12乃至14のいずれか一項に記載の包装体。
    In each of the plurality of side surface portions, the distance between the two vertical weakening lines in the width direction or the depth direction is 30% of the length of each of the plurality of side surface portions in the width direction or the depth direction. Above, 80% or less,
    The package according to any one of claims 12 to 14.
  16.  前記横弱め線における前記幅方向又は奥行方向の中央部分を構成する弱め部同士の距離は、前記二本の縦弱め線の各々を構成する弱め部同士の距離よりも短い、
     請求項12乃至15のいずれか一項に記載の包装体。
    The distance between the weakening portions constituting the central portion in the width direction or the depth direction of the horizontal weakening line is shorter than the distance between the weakening portions constituting each of the two vertical weakening lines.
    The package according to any one of claims 12 to 15.
  17.  前記複数の吸収性物品は、前記上下方向に少なくとも二段に積層されており、
     前記二本の縦弱め線における前記上下方向の下端の位置は、
      前記複数の吸収性物品のうちの最上段の吸収性物品における前記上下方向の下端の位置よりも高く、
      前記最上段の吸収性物品における前記上下方向の中間の位置よりも低い、
     請求項12乃至16のいずれか一項に記載の包装体。
    The plurality of absorbent articles are laminated in at least two stages in the vertical direction.
    The position of the lower end in the vertical direction on the two vertical weakening lines is
    It is higher than the position of the lower end in the vertical direction in the uppermost absorbent article among the plurality of absorbent articles.
    Lower than the middle position in the vertical direction in the uppermost absorbent article,
    The package according to any one of claims 12 to 16.
  18.  前記右面部及び前記左面部の少なくとも一方と、前記前面部及び前記後面部の少なくとも一方と、において、前記二本の縦弱め線における前記上下方向の下端の位置は同じである、
     請求項12乃至17のいずれか一項に記載の包装体。
    At least one of the right surface portion and the left surface portion, and at least one of the front surface portion and the rear surface portion, the positions of the lower ends in the vertical direction on the two vertical weakening lines are the same.
    The package according to any one of claims 12 to 17.
  19.  前記右面部及び前記左面部の少なくとも一方と、前記前面部及び前記後面部の少なくとも一方と、において、前記二本の縦弱め線における前記上下方向の上端の位置は、同じである、
     請求項12乃至18のいずれか一項に記載の包装体。
    At least one of the right surface portion and the left surface portion, and at least one of the front surface portion and the rear surface portion, the positions of the upper ends in the vertical direction on the two vertical weakening lines are the same.
    The package according to any one of claims 12 to 18.
  20.  前記右面部及び前記左面部の少なくとも一方における、前記二本の縦弱め線のうちの前記前面部側の縦弱め線と、前記右面部及び前記左面部の少なくとも一方と前記前面部との境界線と、の距離は、前記前面部における、前記二本の縦弱め線のうちの前記右面部及び前記左面部の少なくとも一方の側の縦弱め線と、当該境界線と、の距離と、同じであり、
     前記右面部及び前記左面部の少なくとも一方における、前記二本の縦弱め線のうちの前記後面部側の縦弱め線と、前記右面部及び前記左面部の少なくとも一方と前記後面部との境界線と、の距離は、前記後面部における、前記二本の縦弱め線のうちの前記右面部及び前記左面部の少なくとも一方の側の縦弱め線と、当該境界線と、の距離と、同じである、
     請求項18又は19に記載の包装体。
    The vertical weakening line on the front surface side of the two vertical weakening lines on at least one of the right surface portion and the left surface portion, and the boundary line between at least one of the right surface portion and the left surface portion and the front surface portion. The distance between and is the same as the distance between the boundary line and the vertical weakening line on at least one side of the right surface portion and the left surface portion of the two vertical weakening lines in the front surface portion. can be,
    The vertical weakening line on the rear surface side of the two vertical weakening lines on at least one of the right surface portion and the left surface portion, and the boundary line between at least one of the right surface portion and the left surface portion and the rear surface portion. The distance between and is the same as the distance between the boundary line and the vertical weakening line on at least one side of the right surface portion and the left surface portion of the two vertical weakening lines in the rear surface portion. be,
    The package according to claim 18 or 19.
  21.  幅方向、奥行方向及び上下方向を有し、前面部、後面部、右面部、及び左面部を含む複数の側面部を備え、前記複数の側面部の少なくとも一つに開封部を含み、前記開封部は、前記上下方向に沿って延び、前記幅方向又は前記奥行方向に間隔を空けて並んだ二本の縦弱め線と、前記幅方向又は前記奥行方向に沿って延び、前記二本の縦弱め線における前記上下方向の上側の端部同士をつなぐ横弱め線と、を含む、複数の吸収性物品を収納可能な包装袋であって、
     搬送方向、横断方向、及び厚さ方向を有し、前記搬送方向に沿って延びる筒状の樹脂シート部材における、前記横断方向の両側を、それぞれ前記横断方向の内側に向かって谷折りで折り畳むことにより、前記厚さ方向の一方側及び他方側にそれぞれ位置する前記前面部及び前記後面部と、前記前面部と前記後面部との間に折り畳まれ、前記横断方向の右側及び左側にそれぞれ位置する前記右面部及び前記左面部と、を形成する側面形成工程と、
     前記前面部及び前記後面部のうちの一方側から他方側に向かって弱め線形成刃を押し付けることにより、前記前面部及び前記後面部に、前記搬送方向に延びる前記二本の縦弱め線及び前記横断方向に延びる前記横弱め線を形成すると同時に、前記右面部及び前記左面部に、前記二本の縦弱め線及び前記横弱め線を形成する弱め線形成工程と、
     を備え、
     前記二本の縦弱め線における前記搬送方向の下端の位置は、前記包装袋に前記複数の吸収性物品が収納されているとき、前記複数の吸収性物品における前記搬送方向に平行な前記上下方向の下端の位置よりも高く、前記複数の吸収性物品における前記上下方向の中間の位置よりも低くなるように、形成される、
     包装袋の製造方法。
    It has a width direction, a depth direction, and a vertical direction, has a plurality of side surface portions including a front surface portion, a rear surface portion, a right surface portion, and a left surface portion, and at least one of the plurality of side surface portions includes an opening portion, and the opening portion is included. The portion extends along the vertical direction and extends along the width direction or the depth direction and two vertical weakening lines arranged at intervals in the width direction or the depth direction. A packaging bag capable of storing a plurality of absorbent articles, including a lateral weakening line connecting the upper ends of the weakening line in the vertical direction.
    Folding both sides of the tubular resin sheet member having a transport direction, a transverse direction, and a thickness direction and extending along the transport direction in a valley fold toward the inside of the transverse direction, respectively. Is folded between the front surface portion and the rear surface portion located on one side and the other side in the thickness direction, and the front surface portion and the rear surface portion, respectively, and is located on the right side and the left side in the transverse direction. A side surface forming step for forming the right surface portion and the left surface portion, and
    By pressing the weakening line forming blade from one side of the front surface portion and the rear surface portion toward the other side, the two vertical weakening lines extending in the transport direction and the vertical weakening line extending in the transport direction are applied to the front surface portion and the rear surface portion. A weakening line forming step of forming the two vertical weakening lines and the horizontal weakening line on the right surface portion and the left surface portion at the same time as forming the horizontal weakening line extending in the transverse direction.
    Equipped with
    The position of the lower end of the two vertical weakening lines in the transport direction is the vertical direction parallel to the transport direction of the plurality of absorbent articles when the plurality of absorbent articles are stored in the packaging bag. It is formed so as to be higher than the position of the lower end of the above and lower than the intermediate position in the vertical direction in the plurality of absorbent articles.
    Manufacturing method of packaging bag.
PCT/JP2021/018863 2020-05-27 2021-05-18 Package WO2021241337A1 (en)

Priority Applications (1)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
CN202180038427.9A CN115667090B (en) 2020-05-27 2021-05-18 Packaging body

Applications Claiming Priority (4)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
JP2020092657A JP7106602B2 (en) 2020-05-27 2020-05-27 package
JP2020092663A JP7174010B2 (en) 2020-05-27 2020-05-27 Package and its manufacturing method
JP2020-092657 2020-05-27
JP2020-092663 2020-05-27

Publications (1)

Publication Number Publication Date
WO2021241337A1 true WO2021241337A1 (en) 2021-12-02

Family

ID=78745104

Family Applications (1)

Application Number Title Priority Date Filing Date
PCT/JP2021/018863 WO2021241337A1 (en) 2020-05-27 2021-05-18 Package

Country Status (2)

Country Link
CN (1) CN115667090B (en)
WO (1) WO2021241337A1 (en)

Citations (4)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
JP2001301859A (en) * 2000-04-24 2001-10-31 Crecia Corp Packaging bag for paper diaper or the like
WO2010041026A2 (en) * 2008-10-07 2010-04-15 Cadbury Holdings Limited Packaging
JP2011178422A (en) * 2010-02-26 2011-09-15 Daio Paper Corp Packing bag
JP2012224353A (en) * 2011-04-18 2012-11-15 Cosmo Tec Kk Packaging bag for toilet paper roll

Family Cites Families (1)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
GB2421013B (en) * 2004-12-10 2007-07-11 Amcor Flexibles Europe As Packaging with an openable top wall

Patent Citations (4)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
JP2001301859A (en) * 2000-04-24 2001-10-31 Crecia Corp Packaging bag for paper diaper or the like
WO2010041026A2 (en) * 2008-10-07 2010-04-15 Cadbury Holdings Limited Packaging
JP2011178422A (en) * 2010-02-26 2011-09-15 Daio Paper Corp Packing bag
JP2012224353A (en) * 2011-04-18 2012-11-15 Cosmo Tec Kk Packaging bag for toilet paper roll

Also Published As

Publication number Publication date
CN115667090A (en) 2023-01-31
CN115667090B (en) 2023-06-30

Similar Documents

Publication Publication Date Title
CA2721033C (en) Flexible package with opening means
JP5566721B2 (en) Composite container
CA2721036C (en) Flexible package with tearing means
KR101540619B1 (en) Package of paper slip bunch
JP5791400B2 (en) Absorbent packaging bag
JP2001206358A (en) Paper overwrapping case
JP5285932B2 (en) Packaging container
JP6090563B2 (en) Easy-open packaging bag
WO2021241337A1 (en) Package
JP6447478B2 (en) Film packaging bags
JP7106602B2 (en) package
WO2013187366A1 (en) Package body for storing multiple absorbent articles
JP3141892U (en) Carton laminate
JP2021187468A (en) Package and its manufacturing method
JP6642155B2 (en) Packaging bag
WO2022137909A1 (en) Packaging body
JP5554602B2 (en) Absorbent package
JP7435398B2 (en) packaging box
JP5721565B2 (en) Packaging box
JP7195174B2 (en) Packaging bag and packaging bag manufacturing method
TWI247602B (en) Package for disposable diaper
JP6118449B1 (en) Box sheet
JP3947446B2 (en) Packaging box
JP2009091018A (en) Package and its manufacturing method
TW202241766A (en) Packaging box

Legal Events

Date Code Title Description
121 Ep: the epo has been informed by wipo that ep was designated in this application

Ref document number: 21813505

Country of ref document: EP

Kind code of ref document: A1

WWE Wipo information: entry into national phase

Ref document number: 202217066125

Country of ref document: IN

NENP Non-entry into the national phase

Ref country code: DE

122 Ep: pct application non-entry in european phase

Ref document number: 21813505

Country of ref document: EP

Kind code of ref document: A1